blob: 03ef89852101a411beddb1b2df9d557711020196 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001//===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===//
2//
3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00007//
8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9//
10// This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for
Gordon Henriksen829046b2008-05-08 17:46:35 +000011// SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's
12// basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000013//
14//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
15
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +000020#include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h"
21#include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h"
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth62d42152015-01-15 02:16:27 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h"
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +000030#include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000031#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000032#include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h"
Chandler Carruth219b89b2014-03-04 11:01:28 +000033#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000034#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Chandler Carruth5ad5f152014-01-13 09:26:24 +000037#include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Chandler Carruth03eb0de2014-03-04 10:40:04 +000039#include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h"
42#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +000044#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000045#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h"
Chandler Carruth4220e9c2014-03-04 11:17:44 +000047#include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
Chandler Carrutha4ea2692014-03-04 11:26:31 +000048#include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000049#include "llvm/Pass.h"
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +000050#include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h"
Evan Cheng8b637b12010-08-17 01:34:49 +000051#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +000052#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000053#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000054#include "llvm/Target/TargetLowering.h"
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000055#include "llvm/Target/TargetSubtargetInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000056#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
57#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BuildLibCalls.h"
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +000058#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000059#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Cloning.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000060#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +000061#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h"
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +000062#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000063
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000064using namespace llvm;
Chris Lattnerd616ef52008-11-25 04:42:10 +000065using namespace llvm::PatternMatch;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000066
Chandler Carruth1b9dde02014-04-22 02:02:50 +000067#define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare"
68
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000069STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000070STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated");
71STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts");
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000072STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of "
73 "sunken Cmps");
74STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses "
75 "of sunken Casts");
76STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address "
77 "computations were sunk");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000078STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads");
79STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized");
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +000080STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded,
81 "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads");
82STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000083STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated");
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +000084STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000085STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000086STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed");
Jakob Stoklund Oleseneb12f492010-09-30 20:51:52 +000087
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +000088STATISTIC(NumMemCmpCalls, "Number of memcmp calls");
89STATISTIC(NumMemCmpNotConstant, "Number of memcmp calls without constant size");
90STATISTIC(NumMemCmpGreaterThanMax,
91 "Number of memcmp calls with size greater than max size");
92STATISTIC(NumMemCmpInlined, "Number of inlined memcmp calls");
93
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +000094static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts(
95 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
96 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
97
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000098static cl::opt<bool>
99 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
100 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
101
Benjamin Kramer3d38c172012-05-06 14:25:16 +0000102static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch(
103 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
104 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion."));
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000105
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +0000106static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs(
Eli Friedman5fba1e52017-04-06 22:42:18 +0000107 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +0000108 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs."));
109
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000110static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking(
111 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
112 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches."));
113
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000114static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract(
115 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
116 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
117
118static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract(
119 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
120 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
121
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000122static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion(
123 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
124 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in "
125 "CodeGenPrepare"));
126
127static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion(
128 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
129 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) "
130 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare"));
131
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000132static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect(
133 "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
134 cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders"));
135
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000136static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix(
David Callahan5960d9b12017-06-14 20:35:33 +0000137 "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), cl::ZeroOrMore,
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000138 cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions"));
139
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000140static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge(
141 "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
142 cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / "
143 "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio"));
144
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +0000145static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore(
146 "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
147 cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says."));
148
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000149static cl::opt<bool>
150EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden,
151 cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating"
152 " the other."), cl::init(true));
153
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +0000154static cl::opt<unsigned> MemCmpNumLoadsPerBlock(
155 "memcmp-num-loads-per-block", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1),
156 cl::desc("The number of loads per basic block for inline expansion of "
157 "memcmp that is only being compared against zero."));
158
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000159namespace {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000160typedef SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> SetOfInstrs;
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +0000161typedef PointerIntPair<Type *, 1, bool> TypeIsSExt;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +0000162typedef DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt> InstrToOrigTy;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000163typedef SmallVector<Instruction *, 16> SExts;
164typedef DenseMap<Value *, SExts> ValueToSExts;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000165class TypePromotionTransaction;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000166
Chris Lattner2dd09db2009-09-02 06:11:42 +0000167 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass {
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000168 const TargetMachine *TM;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000169 const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000170 const TargetLowering *TLI;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000171 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI;
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000172 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI;
Chad Rosierc24b86f2011-12-01 03:08:23 +0000173 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo;
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000174 const LoopInfo *LI;
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000175 std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI;
176 std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000177
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000178 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction
179 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it.
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +0000180 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator;
Evan Cheng3b3de7c2008-12-19 18:03:11 +0000181
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000182 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block.
183 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with
184 /// multiple load/stores of the same address.
Nick Lewycky5fb19632013-05-08 09:00:10 +0000185 ValueMap<Value*, Value*> SunkAddrs;
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000186
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000187 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function.
188 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000189 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their
190 /// promotion for the current function.
191 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts;
192
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000193 /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion.
194 SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts;
195
196 /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value.
197 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt;
198
199 /// Keep track of SExt promoted.
200 ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses;
201
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000202 /// True if CFG is modified in any way.
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000203 bool ModifiedDT;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000204
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000205 /// True if optimizing for size.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000206 bool OptSize;
207
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000208 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed.
209 const DataLayout *DL;
210
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000211 public:
Nick Lewyckye7da2d62007-05-06 13:37:16 +0000212 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000213 CodeGenPrepare()
214 : FunctionPass(ID), TM(nullptr), TLI(nullptr), TTI(nullptr),
215 DL(nullptr) {
216 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
217 }
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000218 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000219
Mehdi Amini117296c2016-10-01 02:56:57 +0000220 StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; }
Evan Cheng99cafb12012-12-21 01:48:14 +0000221
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000222 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override {
George Burgess IVd4febd12016-03-22 21:25:08 +0000223 // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree.
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000224 AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000225 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruth705b1852015-01-31 03:43:40 +0000226 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>();
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000227 AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>();
Andreas Neustifterf8cb7582009-09-16 09:26:52 +0000228 }
229
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000230 private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000231 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F);
232 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F);
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000233 BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000234 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const;
235 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000236 bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB,
237 bool isPreheader);
Sanjay Patel3b8974b2017-06-08 20:00:09 +0000238 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT);
239 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000240 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *I, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +0000241 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000242 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS);
Sanjay Patel3b8974b2017-06-08 20:00:09 +0000243 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT);
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000244 bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000245 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +0000246 bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000247 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI);
248 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SI);
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +0000249 bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *CI);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000250 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst);
251 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB);
252 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +0000253 bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts,
254 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted);
255 bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
256 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
257 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
258 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0);
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000259 bool mergeSExts(Function &F);
260 bool performAddressTypePromotion(
261 Instruction *&Inst,
262 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
263 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
264 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000265 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000266 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I);
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000267 bool splitIndirectCriticalEdges(Function &F);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000268 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000269}
Devang Patel09f162c2007-05-01 21:15:47 +0000270
Devang Patel8c78a0b2007-05-03 01:11:54 +0000271char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0;
Matthias Braun1527baa2017-05-25 21:26:32 +0000272INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000273 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000274INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass)
Matthias Braun1527baa2017-05-25 21:26:32 +0000275INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE,
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000276 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000277
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000278FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); }
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000279
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000280bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) {
Andrew Kayloraa641a52016-04-22 22:06:11 +0000281 if (skipFunction(F))
Paul Robinson7c99ec52014-03-31 17:43:35 +0000282 return false;
283
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000284 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout();
285
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000286 bool EverMadeChange = false;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000287 // Clear per function information.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000288 InsertedInsts.clear();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000289 PromotedInsts.clear();
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000290 BFI.reset();
291 BPI.reset();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000292
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000293 ModifiedDT = false;
Francis Visoiu Mistrih8b617642017-05-18 17:21:13 +0000294 if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) {
295 TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>();
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +0000296 SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F);
297 TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering();
298 TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo();
299 }
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000300 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI();
Chandler Carruthfdb9c572015-02-01 12:01:35 +0000301 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F);
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000302 LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo();
Sanjay Patel82d91dd2015-08-11 19:39:36 +0000303 OptSize = F.optForSize();
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000304
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000305 if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) {
306 ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI =
307 getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI();
Dehao Chen775341a2017-03-23 23:14:11 +0000308 if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F))
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000309 F.setSectionPrefix(".hot");
Dehao Chen775341a2017-03-23 23:14:11 +0000310 else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F))
Teresa Johnson720d9b42017-05-09 01:43:24 +0000311 F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely");
Dehao Chen302b69c2016-10-18 20:42:47 +0000312 }
313
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000314 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be
315 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide.
Preston Gurd485296d2013-03-04 18:13:57 +0000316 if (!OptSize && TLI && TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) {
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000317 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths =
318 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths();
Eric Christopher49a7d6c2016-01-04 23:18:58 +0000319 BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin();
320 while (BB != nullptr) {
321 // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the
322 // optimization to those blocks.
323 BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode();
324 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths);
325 BB = Next;
326 }
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000327 }
328
329 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000330 // unconditional branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000331 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000332
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000333 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000334 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000335 // find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000336 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000337
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +0000338 if (!DisableBranchOpts)
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000339 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F);
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000340
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000341 // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch,
342 // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges.
343 EverMadeChange |= splitIndirectCriticalEdges(F);
344
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000345 bool MadeChange = true;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000346 while (MadeChange) {
347 MadeChange = false;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000348 SeenChainsForSExt.clear();
349 ValToSExtendedUses.clear();
350 RemovedInsts.clear();
Hans Wennborg02fbc712012-09-19 07:48:16 +0000351 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000352 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000353 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000354 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000355
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000356 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000357 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration)
358 break;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000359 }
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000360 if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty())
361 MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F);
362
363 // Really free removed instructions during promotion.
364 for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts)
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +0000365 I->deleteValue();
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +0000366
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000367 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
368 }
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000369
370 SunkAddrs.clear();
371
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000372 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
373 MadeChange = false;
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000374 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +0000375 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
376 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB));
377 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true);
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000378 if (!MadeChange) continue;
379
380 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
381 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
382 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
383 WorkList.insert(*II);
384 }
385
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000386 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors.
Bill Wendlingab417b62012-12-06 00:30:20 +0000387 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty();
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000388 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
389 BasicBlock *BB = *WorkList.begin();
390 WorkList.erase(BB);
391 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
392
393 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +0000394
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000395 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
396 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
397 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
398 WorkList.insert(*II);
399 }
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000400
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000401 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by
402 // a single edge.
403 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000404 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000405
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000406 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
407 }
408
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000409 if (!DisableGCOpts) {
410 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints;
411 for (BasicBlock &BB : F)
412 for (Instruction &I : BB)
413 if (isStatepoint(I))
414 Statepoints.push_back(&I);
415 for (auto &I : Statepoints)
416 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I);
417 }
418
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000419 return EverMadeChange;
420}
421
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000422/// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the
423/// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block,
424/// which has a single predecessor.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000425bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) {
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000426 bool Changed = false;
427 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000428 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000429 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000430 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial
431 // edge, just collapse it.
432 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
433
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +0000434 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken.
435 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000436
437 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator());
438 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) {
439 Changed = true;
Michael Liao6e12d122012-08-21 05:55:22 +0000440 DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n"<< *SinglePred << "\n\n\n");
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000441 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function.
442 // If so, we will need to move BB back to the entry position.
443 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000444 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(BB, nullptr);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000445
446 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
447 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
448
449 // We have erased a block. Update the iterator.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000450 I = BB->getIterator();
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000451 }
452 }
453 return Changed;
454}
455
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000456/// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block.
457BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
458 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it.
459 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
460 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional())
461 return nullptr;
462
463 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi
464 // node, then other stuff is happening here.
465 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator();
466 if (BBI != BB->begin()) {
467 --BBI;
468 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) {
469 if (BBI == BB->begin())
470 break;
471 --BBI;
472 }
473 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI))
474 return nullptr;
475 }
476
477 // Do not break infinite loops.
478 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
479 if (DestBB == BB)
480 return nullptr;
481
482 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB))
483 DestBB = nullptr;
484
485 return DestBB;
486}
487
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000488// Return the unique indirectbr predecessor of a block. This may return null
489// even if such a predecessor exists, if it's not useful for splitting.
490// If a predecessor is found, OtherPreds will contain all other (non-indirectbr)
491// predecessors of BB.
492static BasicBlock *
493findIBRPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB, SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock *> &OtherPreds) {
494 // If the block doesn't have any PHIs, we don't care about it, since there's
495 // no point in splitting it.
496 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
497 if (!PN)
498 return nullptr;
499
500 // Verify we have exactly one IBR predecessor.
501 // Conservatively bail out if one of the other predecessors is not a "regular"
502 // terminator (that is, not a switch or a br).
503 BasicBlock *IBB = nullptr;
504 for (unsigned Pred = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); Pred != E; ++Pred) {
505 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(Pred);
506 TerminatorInst *PredTerm = PredBB->getTerminator();
507 switch (PredTerm->getOpcode()) {
508 case Instruction::IndirectBr:
509 if (IBB)
510 return nullptr;
511 IBB = PredBB;
512 break;
513 case Instruction::Br:
514 case Instruction::Switch:
515 OtherPreds.push_back(PredBB);
516 continue;
517 default:
518 return nullptr;
519 }
520 }
521
522 return IBB;
523}
524
525// Split critical edges where the source of the edge is an indirectbr
526// instruction. This isn't always possible, but we can handle some easy cases.
527// This is useful because MI is unable to split such critical edges,
528// which means it will not be able to sink instructions along those edges.
529// This is especially painful for indirect branches with many successors, where
530// we end up having to prepare all outgoing values in the origin block.
531//
532// Our normal algorithm for splitting critical edges requires us to update
533// the outgoing edges of the edge origin block, but for an indirectbr this
534// is hard, since it would require finding and updating the block addresses
535// the indirect branch uses. But if a block only has a single indirectbr
536// predecessor, with the others being regular branches, we can do it in a
537// different way.
538// Say we have A -> D, B -> D, I -> D where only I -> D is an indirectbr.
539// We can split D into D0 and D1, where D0 contains only the PHIs from D,
540// and D1 is the D block body. We can then duplicate D0 as D0A and D0B, and
541// create the following structure:
542// A -> D0A, B -> D0A, I -> D0B, D0A -> D1, D0B -> D1
543bool CodeGenPrepare::splitIndirectCriticalEdges(Function &F) {
544 // Check whether the function has any indirectbrs, and collect which blocks
545 // they may jump to. Since most functions don't have indirect branches,
546 // this lowers the common case's overhead to O(Blocks) instead of O(Edges).
547 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Targets;
548 for (auto &BB : F) {
549 auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB.getTerminator());
550 if (!IBI)
551 continue;
552
553 for (unsigned Succ = 0, E = IBI->getNumSuccessors(); Succ != E; ++Succ)
554 Targets.insert(IBI->getSuccessor(Succ));
555 }
556
557 if (Targets.empty())
558 return false;
559
560 bool Changed = false;
561 for (BasicBlock *Target : Targets) {
562 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> OtherPreds;
563 BasicBlock *IBRPred = findIBRPredecessor(Target, OtherPreds);
564 // If we did not found an indirectbr, or the indirectbr is the only
565 // incoming edge, this isn't the kind of edge we're looking for.
566 if (!IBRPred || OtherPreds.empty())
567 continue;
568
569 // Don't even think about ehpads/landingpads.
570 Instruction *FirstNonPHI = Target->getFirstNonPHI();
571 if (FirstNonPHI->isEHPad() || Target->isLandingPad())
572 continue;
573
574 BasicBlock *BodyBlock = Target->splitBasicBlock(FirstNonPHI, ".split");
575 // It's possible Target was its own successor through an indirectbr.
576 // In this case, the indirectbr now comes from BodyBlock.
577 if (IBRPred == Target)
578 IBRPred = BodyBlock;
579
580 // At this point Target only has PHIs, and BodyBlock has the rest of the
581 // block's body. Create a copy of Target that will be used by the "direct"
582 // preds.
583 ValueToValueMapTy VMap;
584 BasicBlock *DirectSucc = CloneBasicBlock(Target, VMap, ".clone", &F);
585
Brendon Cahoon7769a082017-04-17 19:11:04 +0000586 for (BasicBlock *Pred : OtherPreds) {
587 // If the target is a loop to itself, then the terminator of the split
588 // block needs to be updated.
589 if (Pred == Target)
590 BodyBlock->getTerminator()->replaceUsesOfWith(Target, DirectSucc);
591 else
592 Pred->getTerminator()->replaceUsesOfWith(Target, DirectSucc);
593 }
Michael Kuperstein13bf8a22017-02-28 00:11:34 +0000594
595 // Ok, now fix up the PHIs. We know the two blocks only have PHIs, and that
596 // they are clones, so the number of PHIs are the same.
597 // (a) Remove the edge coming from IBRPred from the "Direct" PHI
598 // (b) Leave that as the only edge in the "Indirect" PHI.
599 // (c) Merge the two in the body block.
600 BasicBlock::iterator Indirect = Target->begin(),
601 End = Target->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
602 BasicBlock::iterator Direct = DirectSucc->begin();
603 BasicBlock::iterator MergeInsert = BodyBlock->getFirstInsertionPt();
604
605 assert(&*End == Target->getTerminator() &&
606 "Block was expected to only contain PHIs");
607
608 while (Indirect != End) {
609 PHINode *DirPHI = cast<PHINode>(Direct);
610 PHINode *IndPHI = cast<PHINode>(Indirect);
611
612 // Now, clean up - the direct block shouldn't get the indirect value,
613 // and vice versa.
614 DirPHI->removeIncomingValue(IBRPred);
615 Direct++;
616
617 // Advance the pointer here, to avoid invalidation issues when the old
618 // PHI is erased.
619 Indirect++;
620
621 PHINode *NewIndPHI = PHINode::Create(IndPHI->getType(), 1, "ind", IndPHI);
622 NewIndPHI->addIncoming(IndPHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(IBRPred),
623 IBRPred);
624
625 // Create a PHI in the body block, to merge the direct and indirect
626 // predecessors.
627 PHINode *MergePHI =
628 PHINode::Create(IndPHI->getType(), 2, "merge", &*MergeInsert);
629 MergePHI->addIncoming(NewIndPHI, Target);
630 MergePHI->addIncoming(DirPHI, DirectSucc);
631
632 IndPHI->replaceAllUsesWith(MergePHI);
633 IndPHI->eraseFromParent();
634 }
635
636 Changed = true;
637 }
638
639 return Changed;
640}
641
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000642/// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an
643/// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split
644/// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these
645/// blocks so we can split them the way we want them.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000646bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) {
Chuang-Yu Chengd3fb38c2016-04-05 14:06:20 +0000647 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders;
648 SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end());
649 while (!LoopList.empty()) {
650 Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val();
651 LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end());
652 if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader())
653 Preheaders.insert(Preheader);
654 }
655
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000656 bool MadeChange = false;
657 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000658 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +0000659 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++;
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000660 BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB);
661 if (!DestBB ||
662 !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB)))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000663 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000664
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000665 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000666 MadeChange = true;
667 }
668 return MadeChange;
669}
670
Jun Bum Lim90b6b502016-12-16 20:38:39 +0000671bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB,
672 BasicBlock *DestBB,
673 bool isPreheader) {
674 // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge.
675 // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the
676 // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be
677 // spilled in the loop body instead.
678 if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader &&
679 !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() &&
680 BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor()))
681 return false;
682
683 // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a
684 // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block
685 // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to
686 // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not
687 // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be
688 // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping
689 // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the
690 // predecessor of BB.
691 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor();
692 if (!Pred ||
693 !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) ||
694 isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator())))
695 return true;
696
697 if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHI())
698 return true;
699
700 // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is
701 // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of
702 // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the
703 // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and
704 // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy).
705 // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to :
706 // Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2.
707 // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming
708 // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such
709 // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies.
710
711 if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()))
712 return true;
713
714 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs;
715
716 // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in
717 // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB.
718 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E;
719 ++PI) {
720 BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI;
721 if (DestBBPred == BB)
722 continue;
723
724 bool HasAllSameValue = true;
725 BasicBlock::const_iterator DestBBI = DestBB->begin();
726 while (const PHINode *DestPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBBI++)) {
727 if (DestPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) !=
728 DestPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred)) {
729 HasAllSameValue = false;
730 break;
731 }
732 }
733 if (HasAllSameValue)
734 SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred);
735 }
736
737 // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this
738 // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in
739 // Pred already.
740 if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred))
741 return true;
742
743 if (!BFI) {
744 Function &F = *BB->getParent();
745 LoopInfo LI{DominatorTree(F)};
746 BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, LI));
747 BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, LI));
748 }
749
750 BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred);
751 BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB);
752
753 for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs)
754 if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred &&
755 DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB))
756 BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB);
757
758 return PredFreq.getFrequency() <=
759 BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge;
760}
761
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000762/// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single
763/// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000764/// instructions.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000765bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB,
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000766 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const {
767 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in
768 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders),
769 // don't mess around with them.
770 BasicBlock::const_iterator BBI = BB->begin();
771 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000772 for (const User *U : PN->users()) {
773 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
774 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000775 return false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000776 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check
777 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000778 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000779 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) {
780 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000781 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
782 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I));
783 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB &&
784 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I))
785 return false;
786 }
787 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000788 }
789 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000790
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000791 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB
792 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we
793 // can't merge the block.
794 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin());
795 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict.
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000796
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000797 // Collect the preds of BB.
Chris Lattner8201a9b2007-11-06 22:07:40 +0000798 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000799 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
800 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator.
801 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
802 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
803 } else {
804 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
805 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000806
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000807 // Walk the preds of DestBB.
808 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
809 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i);
810 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor?
811 BBI = DestBB->begin();
812 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
813 const Value *V1 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
814 const Value *V2 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000815
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000816 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be.
817 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2))
818 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB)
819 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000820
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000821 // If there is a conflict, bail out.
822 if (V1 != V2) return false;
823 }
824 }
825 }
826
827 return true;
828}
829
830
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000831/// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in
832/// it.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000833void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000834 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
835 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000836
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000837 DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" << *BB << *DestBB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000838
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000839 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge,
840 // just collapse it.
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000841 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000842 if (SinglePred != DestBB) {
843 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function. If so, we
844 // will need to move BB back to the entry position.
845 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000846 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(DestBB, nullptr);
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000847
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000848 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
849 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000850
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000851 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000852 return;
853 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000854 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000855
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000856 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB
857 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have.
858 PHINode *PN;
859 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = DestBB->begin();
860 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
861 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it.
862 Value *InVal = PN->removeIncomingValue(BB, false);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000863
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000864 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some
865 // value that dominates BB.
866 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
867 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) {
868 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi.
869 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
870 PN->addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i),
871 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i));
872 } else {
873 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that
874 // we will be adding.
875 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
876 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
877 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
878 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000879 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
880 PN->addIncoming(InVal, *PI);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000881 }
882 }
883 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000884
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000885 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use
886 // DestBB and remove BB.
887 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB);
888 BB->eraseFromParent();
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000889 ++NumBlocksElim;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000890
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000891 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000892}
893
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000894// Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding
895// derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls
896static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000897 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls,
898 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>>
899 &RelocateInstMap) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000900 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object
901 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding
902 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000903 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap;
904 for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) {
905 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(),
906 ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex());
907 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000908 }
909 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) {
910 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first;
911 if (Key.first == Key.second)
912 // Base relocation: nothing to insert
913 continue;
914
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000915 GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000916 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first);
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000917
918 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it.
919 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey);
920 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end())
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000921 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off
922 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates.
923 continue;
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000924
925 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000926 }
927}
928
929// Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all
930// small integer constants
931static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP,
932 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) {
933 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) {
934 // Only accept small constant integer operands
935 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i));
936 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20)
937 return false;
938 }
939
940 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++)
941 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i));
942 return true;
943}
944
945// Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to
946// replace, computes a replacement, and affects it.
947static bool
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000948simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase,
949 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000950 bool MadeChange = false;
Serguei Katkov9e5604d2017-08-17 05:48:30 +0000951 // We must ensure the relocation of derived pointer is defined after
952 // relocation of base pointer. If we find a relocation corresponding to base
953 // defined earlier than relocation of base then we move relocation of base
954 // right before found relocation. We consider only relocation in the same
955 // basic block as relocation of base. Relocations from other basic block will
956 // be skipped by optimization and we do not care about them.
957 for (auto R = RelocatedBase->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt();
958 &*R != RelocatedBase; ++R)
959 if (auto RI = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(R))
960 if (RI->getStatepoint() == RelocatedBase->getStatepoint())
961 if (RI->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex()) {
962 RelocatedBase->moveBefore(RI);
963 break;
964 }
965
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000966 for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) {
967 assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() &&
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000968 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object");
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000969 if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000970 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates.
971 continue;
972 }
973
Igor Laevskyf637b4a2015-11-03 18:37:40 +0000974 if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) {
975 // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks.
976 // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived
977 // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance
978 // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation.
979 continue;
980 }
981
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +0000982 Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr();
983 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000984 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base)
985 continue;
986
987 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV;
988 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV))
989 continue;
990
991 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep
Sanjay Patel545a4562016-01-20 18:59:16 +0000992 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() &&
993 "Should always have one since it's not a terminator");
Sanjoy Das3d705e32015-05-11 23:47:30 +0000994
995 // Insert after RelocatedBase
996 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000997 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000998
999 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type.
1000 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not
1001 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be
1002 // cases like this:
1003 // bb1:
1004 // ...
1005 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
1006 // br label %merge
1007 //
1008 // bb2:
1009 // ...
1010 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
1011 // br label %merge
1012 //
1013 // merge:
1014 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ]
1015 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)*
1016 //
1017 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast
1018 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and
1019 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes.
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001020 Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase;
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001021 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) {
1022 ActualRelocatedBase =
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001023 Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001024 }
David Blaikie68d535c2015-03-24 22:38:16 +00001025 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP(
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001026 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001027 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace);
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001028 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived
1029 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above.
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001030 Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement;
1031 if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) {
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001032 ActualReplacement =
Manuel Jacob5b90b142015-12-19 18:38:42 +00001033 Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +00001034 }
1035 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001036 ToReplace->eraseFromParent();
1037
1038 MadeChange = true;
1039 }
1040 return MadeChange;
1041}
1042
1043// Turns this:
1044//
1045// %base = ...
1046// %ptr = gep %base + 15
1047// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
1048// %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
1049// %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5)
1050// %val = load %ptr'
1051//
1052// into this:
1053//
1054// %base = ...
1055// %ptr = gep %base + 15
1056// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
1057// %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
1058// %ptr' = gep %base' + 15
1059// %val = load %ptr'
1060bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) {
1061 bool MadeChange = false;
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001062 SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001063
1064 for (auto *U : I.users())
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001065 if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U))
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001066 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001067 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001068
1069 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer
1070 // relocation to mangle
1071 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2)
1072 return false;
1073
1074 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the
1075 // corresponding derived relocate instructions
Manuel Jacob83eefa62016-01-05 04:03:00 +00001076 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap;
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +00001077 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap);
1078 if (RelocateInstMap.empty())
1079 return false;
1080
1081 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap)
1082 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against
1083 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace
1084 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second);
1085 return MadeChange;
1086}
1087
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001088/// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks
1089static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001090 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001091
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001092 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001093 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001094
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001095 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001096 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001097 UI != E; ) {
1098 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1099 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001100
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001101 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the
1102 // appropriate predecessor block.
1103 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1104 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001105 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001106 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001107
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001108 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1109 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001110
David Majnemer0c80e2e2016-04-27 19:36:38 +00001111 // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the
1112 // pad. If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad.
1113 if (User->isEHPad())
1114 continue;
1115
Andrew Kaylord0430e82015-11-23 19:16:15 +00001116 // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not
1117 // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the
1118 // cast.
1119 if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
1120 continue;
1121
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001122 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast.
1123 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001124
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001125 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it.
1126 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB];
1127
1128 if (!InsertedCast) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00001129 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001130 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
1131 InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0),
1132 CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001133 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001134
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001135 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001136 TheUse = InsertedCast;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001137 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00001138 ++NumCastUses;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001139 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001140
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001141 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast.
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +00001142 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001143 CI->eraseFromParent();
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +00001144 MadeChange = true;
1145 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001146
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001147 return MadeChange;
1148}
1149
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001150/// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from
1151/// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to
1152/// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced.
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001153///
1154/// Return true if any changes are made.
1155///
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001156static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI,
1157 const DataLayout &DL) {
Justin Lebar3e50a5b2016-11-21 22:49:15 +00001158 // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts. This is a weaker condition
1159 // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms.
1160 if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) {
1161 if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(),
1162 ASC->getDestAddressSpace()))
1163 return false;
1164 }
1165
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001166 // If this is a noop copy,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001167 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType());
1168 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType());
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00001169
1170 // This is an fp<->int conversion?
1171 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger())
1172 return false;
1173
1174 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which
1175 // isn't a noop.
1176 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false;
1177
1178 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted
1179 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they
1180 // are.
1181 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) ==
1182 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1183 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT);
1184 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) ==
1185 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
1186 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT);
1187
1188 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy.
1189 if (SrcVT != DstVT)
1190 return false;
1191
1192 return SinkCast(CI);
1193}
1194
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001195/// Try to combine CI into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if
1196/// possible.
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001197///
1198/// Return true if any changes were made.
1199static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) {
1200 Value *A, *B;
1201 Instruction *AddI;
1202 if (!match(CI,
1203 m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI))))
1204 return false;
1205
1206 Type *Ty = AddI->getType();
1207 if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty))
1208 return false;
1209
1210 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we
1211 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic
1212 // block containing the icmp:
1213
1214 if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse())
1215 return false;
1216
1217#ifndef NDEBUG
1218 // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption
1219 // for now:
1220 if (AddI->hasOneUse())
1221 assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!");
1222#endif
1223
Sanjay Patelaf674fb2015-12-14 17:24:23 +00001224 Module *M = CI->getModule();
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001225 Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty);
1226
1227 auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI;
1228
1229 auto *UAddWithOverflow =
1230 CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt);
1231 auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt);
1232 auto *Overflow =
1233 ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt);
1234
1235 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow);
1236 AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd);
1237 CI->eraseFromParent();
1238 AddI->eraseFromParent();
1239 return true;
1240}
1241
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001242/// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual
1243/// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on
1244/// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might
1245/// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001246///
1247/// Return true if any changes are made.
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001248static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001249 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001250
Peter Zotov0b6d7bc2016-04-03 16:36:17 +00001251 // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop.
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001252 if (TLI && TLI->useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(CI))
Peter Zotov0b6d7bc2016-04-03 16:36:17 +00001253 return false;
1254
1255 // Only insert a cmp in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001256 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001257
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001258 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001259 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001260 UI != E; ) {
1261 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1262 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001263
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001264 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1265 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001266
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001267 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1268 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1269 continue;
1270
1271 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in.
1272 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001273
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001274 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp.
1275 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001276
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001277 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it.
1278 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB];
1279
1280 if (!InsertedCmp) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00001281 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001282 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001283 InsertedCmp =
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001284 CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getPredicate(),
1285 CI->getOperand(0), CI->getOperand(1), "", &*InsertPt);
Wolfgang Piebe51bede2016-10-06 21:43:45 +00001286 // Propagate the debug info.
1287 InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc());
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001288 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001289
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001290 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp.
1291 TheUse = InsertedCmp;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001292 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00001293 ++NumCmpUses;
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001294 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001295
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001296 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp.
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001297 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001298 CI->eraseFromParent();
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +00001299 MadeChange = true;
1300 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00001301
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +00001302 return MadeChange;
1303}
1304
Peter Zotovf87e5502016-04-03 17:11:53 +00001305static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI, const TargetLowering *TLI) {
Peter Zotov8efe38a2016-04-03 19:32:13 +00001306 if (SinkCmpExpression(CI, TLI))
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +00001307 return true;
1308
1309 if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI))
1310 return true;
1311
1312 return false;
1313}
1314
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00001315/// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is
1316/// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where
1317/// this operation can be combined.
1318///
1319/// Return true if any changes are made.
1320static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI,
1321 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1322 SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) {
1323 // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was
1324 // already optimized by some other part of this pass.
1325 assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) &&
1326 "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction");
1327 (void) InsertedInsts;
1328
1329 // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block.
1330 if (AndI->hasOneUse() &&
1331 AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent())
1332 return false;
1333
1334 // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register
1335 // pressure.
1336 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) &&
1337 !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) &&
1338 AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse())
1339 return false;
1340
1341 for (auto *U : AndI->users()) {
1342 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U);
1343
1344 // Only sink for and mask feeding icmp with 0.
1345 if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User))
1346 return false;
1347
1348 auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1));
1349 if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero())
1350 return false;
1351 }
1352
1353 if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI))
1354 return false;
1355
1356 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n");
1357 DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump());
1358
1359 // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0. There should only be
1360 // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any
1361 // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into.
1362 for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end();
1363 UI != E; ) {
1364 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1365 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1366
1367 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1368 ++UI;
1369
1370 DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n");
1371
1372 // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block.
1373 Instruction *InsertPt =
1374 User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User;
1375 Instruction *InsertedAnd =
1376 BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0),
1377 AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt);
1378 // Propagate the debug info.
1379 InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc());
1380
1381 // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'.
1382 TheUse = InsertedAnd;
1383 ++NumAndUses;
1384 DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump());
1385 }
1386
1387 // We removed all uses, nuke the and.
1388 AndI->eraseFromParent();
1389 return true;
1390}
1391
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001392/// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which
1393/// includes:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001394/// 1. Truncate instruction
1395/// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits:
1396/// imm & (imm+1) == 0
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +00001397static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001398 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) {
1399 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And ||
1400 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)))
1401 return false;
1402
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +00001403 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue();
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001404
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +00001405 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue())
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001406 return false;
1407 }
1408 return true;
1409}
1410
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001411/// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB.
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +00001412static bool
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001413SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI,
1414 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001415 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001416 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1417 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs;
1418 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User);
1419 bool MadeChange = false;
1420
1421 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(),
1422 TruncE = TruncI->user_end();
1423 TruncUI != TruncE;) {
1424
1425 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse();
1426 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI);
1427 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1428
1429 ++TruncUI;
1430
1431 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode());
1432 if (!ISDOpcode)
1433 continue;
1434
Tim Northovere2239ff2014-07-29 10:20:22 +00001435 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an
1436 // implicit truncate.
1437 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an
1438 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the
1439 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though.
Ahmed Bougacha0788d492014-11-12 22:16:55 +00001440 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001441 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true)))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001442 continue;
1443
1444 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1445 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser))
1446 continue;
1447
1448 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent();
1449
1450 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB)
1451 continue;
1452
1453 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB];
1454 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB];
1455
1456 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) {
1457 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001458 assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001459 // Sink the shift
1460 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001461 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1462 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001463 else
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001464 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1465 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001466
1467 // Sink the trunc
1468 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1469 TruncInsertPt++;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001470 assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001471
1472 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001473 TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001474
1475 MadeChange = true;
1476
1477 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc;
1478 }
1479 }
1480 return MadeChange;
1481}
1482
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001483/// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could
1484/// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract
1485/// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract
1486/// instruction. Here is an example:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001487/// BB1:
1488/// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1489/// BB2:
1490/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16
1491/// ==>
1492///
1493/// BB2:
1494/// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
1495/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16
1496///
1497/// CodeGen will recoginze the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract
1498/// instruction.
1499/// Return true if any changes are made.
1500static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001501 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1502 const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001503 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent();
1504
1505 /// Only insert instructions in each block once.
1506 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts;
1507
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001508 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType()));
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001509
1510 bool MadeChange = false;
1511 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end();
1512 UI != E;) {
1513 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1514 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1515 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1516 ++UI;
1517
1518 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1519 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1520 continue;
1521
1522 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User))
1523 continue;
1524
1525 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1526
1527 if (UserBB == DefBB) {
1528 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of
1529 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not
1530 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate
1531 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse.
1532 // for example:
1533 // BB1:
1534 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm
1535 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16
1536 //
1537 // BB2:
1538 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does
1539 // not have i16 compare.
1540 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2
1541 //
1542 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal
1543 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no trucate will be
1544 // introduced in other basic blocks.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001545 &&
1546 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType()))))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001547 MadeChange =
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001548 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001549
1550 continue;
1551 }
1552 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it.
1553 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB];
1554
1555 if (!InsertedShift) {
1556 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001557 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001558
1559 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001560 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1561 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001562 else
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00001563 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI,
1564 "", &*InsertPt);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001565
1566 MadeChange = true;
1567 }
1568
1569 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift.
1570 TheUse = InsertedShift;
1571 }
1572
1573 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift.
1574 if (ShiftI->use_empty())
1575 ShiftI->eraseFromParent();
1576
1577 return MadeChange;
1578}
1579
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00001580/// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero
1581/// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic.
1582///
1583/// We want to transform:
1584/// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false)
1585///
1586/// into:
1587/// entry:
1588/// %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0
1589/// br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false
1590/// cond.false:
1591/// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true)
1592/// br label %cond.end
1593/// cond.end:
1594/// %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ]
1595///
1596/// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true.
1597static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros,
1598 const TargetLowering *TLI,
1599 const DataLayout *DL,
1600 bool &ModifiedDT) {
1601 if (!TLI || !DL)
1602 return false;
1603
1604 // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that.
1605 if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One()))
1606 return false;
1607
1608 // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do.
1609 auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID();
1610 if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) ||
1611 (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz()))
1612 return false;
1613
1614 // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work.
1615 Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType();
1616 unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Jun Bum Limbe11bdc2016-05-13 18:38:35 +00001617 if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits())
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00001618 return false;
1619
1620 // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch.
1621 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent();
1622 BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false");
1623
1624 // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added
1625 // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width
1626 // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero.
1627 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros));
1628 BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end");
1629
1630 // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI.
1631 IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext());
1632 Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator());
1633 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc());
1634
1635 // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with
1636 // a compare against zero and a conditional branch.
1637 Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty);
1638 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz");
1639 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock);
1640 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
1641
1642 // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic
1643 // or the bit width of the operand.
1644 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front());
1645 PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz");
1646 CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
1647 Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits));
1648 PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock);
1649 PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock);
1650
1651 // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's
1652 // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the
1653 // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined.
1654 CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue());
1655 ModifiedDT = true;
1656 return true;
1657}
1658
Benjamin Kramer49a49fe2017-08-20 13:03:48 +00001659namespace {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001660// This class provides helper functions to expand a memcmp library call into an
1661// inline expansion.
1662class MemCmpExpansion {
1663 struct ResultBlock {
1664 BasicBlock *BB;
1665 PHINode *PhiSrc1;
1666 PHINode *PhiSrc2;
1667 ResultBlock();
1668 };
1669
1670 CallInst *CI;
1671 ResultBlock ResBlock;
1672 unsigned MaxLoadSize;
1673 unsigned NumBlocks;
1674 unsigned NumBlocksNonOneByte;
1675 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock;
1676 std::vector<BasicBlock *> LoadCmpBlocks;
1677 BasicBlock *EndBlock;
1678 PHINode *PhiRes;
1679 bool IsUsedForZeroCmp;
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001680 const DataLayout &DL;
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00001681 IRBuilder<> Builder;
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001682
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00001683 unsigned calculateNumBlocks(unsigned Size);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001684 void createLoadCmpBlocks();
1685 void createResultBlock();
1686 void setupResultBlockPHINodes();
1687 void setupEndBlockPHINodes();
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00001688 void emitLoadCompareBlock(unsigned Index, unsigned LoadSize,
1689 unsigned GEPIndex);
Sanjay Patel60070002017-06-07 13:33:00 +00001690 Value *getCompareLoadPairs(unsigned Index, unsigned Size,
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00001691 unsigned &NumBytesProcessed);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001692 void emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(unsigned Index, unsigned Size,
1693 unsigned &NumBytesProcessed);
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00001694 void emitLoadCompareByteBlock(unsigned Index, unsigned GEPIndex);
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001695 void emitMemCmpResultBlock();
1696 Value *getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(unsigned Size);
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001697 Value *getMemCmpEqZeroOneBlock(unsigned Size);
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00001698 Value *getMemCmpOneBlock(unsigned Size);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001699 unsigned getLoadSize(unsigned Size);
1700 unsigned getNumLoads(unsigned Size);
1701
1702public:
Sanjay Patelcf531ca2017-06-07 15:05:13 +00001703 MemCmpExpansion(CallInst *CI, uint64_t Size, unsigned MaxLoadSize,
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001704 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock, const DataLayout &DL);
1705 Value *getMemCmpExpansion(uint64_t Size);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001706};
Benjamin Kramer49a49fe2017-08-20 13:03:48 +00001707} // namespace
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001708
1709MemCmpExpansion::ResultBlock::ResultBlock()
1710 : BB(nullptr), PhiSrc1(nullptr), PhiSrc2(nullptr) {}
1711
1712// Initialize the basic block structure required for expansion of memcmp call
1713// with given maximum load size and memcmp size parameter.
1714// This structure includes:
1715// 1. A list of load compare blocks - LoadCmpBlocks.
1716// 2. An EndBlock, split from original instruction point, which is the block to
1717// return from.
1718// 3. ResultBlock, block to branch to for early exit when a
1719// LoadCmpBlock finds a difference.
Sanjay Patelcf531ca2017-06-07 15:05:13 +00001720MemCmpExpansion::MemCmpExpansion(CallInst *CI, uint64_t Size,
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001721 unsigned MaxLoadSize, unsigned LoadsPerBlock,
1722 const DataLayout &TheDataLayout)
1723 : CI(CI), MaxLoadSize(MaxLoadSize), NumLoadsPerBlock(LoadsPerBlock),
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00001724 DL(TheDataLayout), Builder(CI) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001725
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001726 // A memcmp with zero-comparison with only one block of load and compare does
1727 // not need to set up any extra blocks. This case could be handled in the DAG,
1728 // but since we have all of the machinery to flexibly expand any memcpy here,
1729 // we choose to handle this case too to avoid fragmented lowering.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001730 IsUsedForZeroCmp = isOnlyUsedInZeroEqualityComparison(CI);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001731 NumBlocks = calculateNumBlocks(Size);
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00001732 if ((!IsUsedForZeroCmp && NumLoadsPerBlock != 1) || NumBlocks != 1) {
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001733 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CI->getParent();
1734 EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CI, "endblock");
1735 setupEndBlockPHINodes();
1736 createResultBlock();
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001737
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001738 // If return value of memcmp is not used in a zero equality, we need to
1739 // calculate which source was larger. The calculation requires the
1740 // two loaded source values of each load compare block.
1741 // These will be saved in the phi nodes created by setupResultBlockPHINodes.
1742 if (!IsUsedForZeroCmp)
1743 setupResultBlockPHINodes();
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001744
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001745 // Create the number of required load compare basic blocks.
1746 createLoadCmpBlocks();
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001747
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001748 // Update the terminator added by splitBasicBlock to branch to the first
1749 // LoadCmpBlock.
1750 StartBlock->getTerminator()->setSuccessor(0, LoadCmpBlocks[0]);
1751 }
1752
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001753 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001754}
1755
1756void MemCmpExpansion::createLoadCmpBlocks() {
1757 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumBlocks; i++) {
1758 BasicBlock *BB = BasicBlock::Create(CI->getContext(), "loadbb",
1759 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
1760 LoadCmpBlocks.push_back(BB);
1761 }
1762}
1763
1764void MemCmpExpansion::createResultBlock() {
1765 ResBlock.BB = BasicBlock::Create(CI->getContext(), "res_block",
1766 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
1767}
1768
1769// This function creates the IR instructions for loading and comparing 1 byte.
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00001770// It loads 1 byte from each source of the memcmp parameters with the given
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001771// GEPIndex. It then subtracts the two loaded values and adds this result to the
1772// final phi node for selecting the memcmp result.
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00001773void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareByteBlock(unsigned Index,
1774 unsigned GEPIndex) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001775 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1776 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1777
1778 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1779 Type *LoadSizeType = Type::getInt8Ty(CI->getContext());
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001780 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001781 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1782 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1783 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1784 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1785
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001786 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001787 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1788 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1789 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1790 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1791 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1792 }
1793
1794 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1795 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1796
1797 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc1, Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()));
1798 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc2, Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()));
1799 Value *Diff = Builder.CreateSub(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
1800
1801 PhiRes->addIncoming(Diff, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1802
1803 if (Index < (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1)) {
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001804 // Early exit branch if difference found to EndBlock. Otherwise, continue to
1805 // next LoadCmpBlock,
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001806 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_NE, Diff,
1807 ConstantInt::get(Diff->getType(), 0));
1808 BranchInst *CmpBr =
1809 BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1], Cmp);
1810 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1811 } else {
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001812 // The last block has an unconditional branch to EndBlock.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001813 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
1814 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1815 }
1816}
1817
1818unsigned MemCmpExpansion::getNumLoads(unsigned Size) {
1819 return (Size / MaxLoadSize) + countPopulation(Size % MaxLoadSize);
1820}
1821
1822unsigned MemCmpExpansion::getLoadSize(unsigned Size) {
1823 return MinAlign(PowerOf2Floor(Size), MaxLoadSize);
1824}
1825
Sanjay Patel60070002017-06-07 13:33:00 +00001826/// Generate an equality comparison for one or more pairs of loaded values.
1827/// This is used in the case where the memcmp() call is compared equal or not
1828/// equal to zero.
1829Value *MemCmpExpansion::getCompareLoadPairs(unsigned Index, unsigned Size,
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00001830 unsigned &NumBytesProcessed) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001831 std::vector<Value *> XorList, OrList;
1832 Value *Diff;
1833
1834 unsigned RemainingBytes = Size - NumBytesProcessed;
1835 unsigned NumLoadsRemaining = getNumLoads(RemainingBytes);
1836 unsigned NumLoads = std::min(NumLoadsRemaining, NumLoadsPerBlock);
1837
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00001838 // For a single-block expansion, start inserting before the memcmp call.
1839 if (LoadCmpBlocks.empty())
1840 Builder.SetInsertPoint(CI);
1841 else
1842 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1843
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001844 Value *Cmp = nullptr;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001845 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumLoads; ++i) {
1846 unsigned LoadSize = getLoadSize(RemainingBytes);
1847 unsigned GEPIndex = NumBytesProcessed / LoadSize;
1848 NumBytesProcessed += LoadSize;
1849 RemainingBytes -= LoadSize;
1850
1851 Type *LoadSizeType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), LoadSize * 8);
1852 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
Sanjay Patel2a6f9f82017-06-21 18:20:52 +00001853 assert(LoadSize <= MaxLoadSize && "Unexpected load type");
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001854
1855 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1856 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1857
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001858 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001859 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1860 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1861 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1862 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1863
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001864 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001865 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1866 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1867 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1868 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1869 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1870 }
1871
Sanjay Patela351a612017-06-19 19:48:35 +00001872 // Get a constant or load a value for each source address.
1873 Value *LoadSrc1 = nullptr;
1874 if (auto *Source1C = dyn_cast<Constant>(Source1))
1875 LoadSrc1 = ConstantFoldLoadFromConstPtr(Source1C, LoadSizeType, DL);
1876 if (!LoadSrc1)
1877 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1878
1879 Value *LoadSrc2 = nullptr;
1880 if (auto *Source2C = dyn_cast<Constant>(Source2))
1881 LoadSrc2 = ConstantFoldLoadFromConstPtr(Source2C, LoadSizeType, DL);
1882 if (!LoadSrc2)
1883 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1884
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001885 if (NumLoads != 1) {
Sanjay Patel8ce1e3b2017-06-07 16:16:45 +00001886 if (LoadSizeType != MaxLoadType) {
Sanjay Patel2a6f9f82017-06-21 18:20:52 +00001887 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc1, MaxLoadType);
1888 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc2, MaxLoadType);
Sanjay Patel8ce1e3b2017-06-07 16:16:45 +00001889 }
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001890 // If we have multiple loads per block, we need to generate a composite
1891 // comparison using xor+or.
1892 Diff = Builder.CreateXor(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
Sanjay Patel2a6f9f82017-06-21 18:20:52 +00001893 Diff = Builder.CreateZExt(Diff, MaxLoadType);
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001894 XorList.push_back(Diff);
1895 } else {
1896 // If there's only one load per block, we just compare the loaded values.
1897 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpNE(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
1898 }
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001899 }
1900
1901 auto pairWiseOr = [&](std::vector<Value *> &InList) -> std::vector<Value *> {
1902 std::vector<Value *> OutList;
1903 for (unsigned i = 0; i < InList.size() - 1; i = i + 2) {
1904 Value *Or = Builder.CreateOr(InList[i], InList[i + 1]);
1905 OutList.push_back(Or);
1906 }
1907 if (InList.size() % 2 != 0)
1908 OutList.push_back(InList.back());
1909 return OutList;
1910 };
1911
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001912 if (!Cmp) {
1913 // Pairwise OR the XOR results.
1914 OrList = pairWiseOr(XorList);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001915
Sanjay Patelf57015d2017-06-07 00:17:08 +00001916 // Pairwise OR the OR results until one result left.
1917 while (OrList.size() != 1) {
1918 OrList = pairWiseOr(OrList);
1919 }
1920 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpNE(OrList[0], ConstantInt::get(Diff->getType(), 0));
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001921 }
1922
Sanjay Patel60070002017-06-07 13:33:00 +00001923 return Cmp;
1924}
1925
1926void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(
1927 unsigned Index, unsigned Size, unsigned &NumBytesProcessed) {
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00001928 Value *Cmp = getCompareLoadPairs(Index, Size, NumBytesProcessed);
Sanjay Patel60070002017-06-07 13:33:00 +00001929
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001930 BasicBlock *NextBB = (Index == (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1))
1931 ? EndBlock
1932 : LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1];
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001933 // Early exit branch if difference found to ResultBlock. Otherwise,
1934 // continue to next LoadCmpBlock or EndBlock.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001935 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(ResBlock.BB, NextBB, Cmp);
1936 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
1937
1938 // Add a phi edge for the last LoadCmpBlock to Endblock with a value of 0
1939 // since early exit to ResultBlock was not taken (no difference was found in
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001940 // any of the bytes).
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001941 if (Index == LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1) {
1942 Value *Zero = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 0);
1943 PhiRes->addIncoming(Zero, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
1944 }
1945}
1946
1947// This function creates the IR intructions for loading and comparing using the
1948// given LoadSize. It loads the number of bytes specified by LoadSize from each
1949// source of the memcmp parameters. It then does a subtract to see if there was
1950// a difference in the loaded values. If a difference is found, it branches
1951// with an early exit to the ResultBlock for calculating which source was
1952// larger. Otherwise, it falls through to the either the next LoadCmpBlock or
1953// the EndBlock if this is the last LoadCmpBlock. Loading 1 byte is handled with
1954// a special case through emitLoadCompareByteBlock. The special handling can
1955// simply subtract the loaded values and add it to the result phi node.
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00001956void MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareBlock(unsigned Index, unsigned LoadSize,
1957 unsigned GEPIndex) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001958 if (LoadSize == 1) {
1959 MemCmpExpansion::emitLoadCompareByteBlock(Index, GEPIndex);
1960 return;
1961 }
1962
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001963 Type *LoadSizeType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), LoadSize * 8);
1964 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
Sanjay Patel2a6f9f82017-06-21 18:20:52 +00001965 assert(LoadSize <= MaxLoadSize && "Unexpected load type");
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001966
1967 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1968 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1969
1970 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001971 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001972 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1973 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1974 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
1975 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
1976
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001977 // Get the base address using the GEPIndex.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001978 if (GEPIndex != 0) {
1979 Source1 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source1,
1980 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1981 Source2 = Builder.CreateGEP(LoadSizeType, Source2,
1982 ConstantInt::get(LoadSizeType, GEPIndex));
1983 }
1984
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00001985 // Load LoadSizeType from the base address.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001986 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
1987 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
1988
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00001989 if (DL.isLittleEndian()) {
Sanjay Patel352e6052017-06-27 19:31:35 +00001990 Function *Bswap = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(CI->getModule(),
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001991 Intrinsic::bswap, LoadSizeType);
1992 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc1);
1993 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc2);
1994 }
1995
1996 if (LoadSizeType != MaxLoadType) {
Sanjay Patel2a6f9f82017-06-21 18:20:52 +00001997 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc1, MaxLoadType);
1998 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc2, MaxLoadType);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00001999 }
2000
2001 // Add the loaded values to the phi nodes for calculating memcmp result only
2002 // if result is not used in a zero equality.
2003 if (!IsUsedForZeroCmp) {
2004 ResBlock.PhiSrc1->addIncoming(LoadSrc1, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
2005 ResBlock.PhiSrc2->addIncoming(LoadSrc2, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
2006 }
2007
Sanjay Patel70b36f12017-06-27 21:46:34 +00002008 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ, LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002009 BasicBlock *NextBB = (Index == (LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1))
2010 ? EndBlock
2011 : LoadCmpBlocks[Index + 1];
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002012 // Early exit branch if difference found to ResultBlock. Otherwise, continue
2013 // to next LoadCmpBlock or EndBlock.
Sanjay Patel70b36f12017-06-27 21:46:34 +00002014 BranchInst *CmpBr = BranchInst::Create(NextBB, ResBlock.BB, Cmp);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002015 Builder.Insert(CmpBr);
2016
2017 // Add a phi edge for the last LoadCmpBlock to Endblock with a value of 0
2018 // since early exit to ResultBlock was not taken (no difference was found in
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002019 // any of the bytes).
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002020 if (Index == LoadCmpBlocks.size() - 1) {
2021 Value *Zero = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 0);
2022 PhiRes->addIncoming(Zero, LoadCmpBlocks[Index]);
2023 }
2024}
2025
2026// This function populates the ResultBlock with a sequence to calculate the
2027// memcmp result. It compares the two loaded source values and returns -1 if
2028// src1 < src2 and 1 if src1 > src2.
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002029void MemCmpExpansion::emitMemCmpResultBlock() {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002030 // Special case: if memcmp result is used in a zero equality, result does not
2031 // need to be calculated and can simply return 1.
2032 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp) {
2033 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = ResBlock.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
2034 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB, InsertPt);
2035 Value *Res = ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 1);
2036 PhiRes->addIncoming(Res, ResBlock.BB);
2037 BranchInst *NewBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
2038 Builder.Insert(NewBr);
2039 return;
2040 }
2041 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = ResBlock.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
2042 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB, InsertPt);
2043
2044 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT, ResBlock.PhiSrc1,
2045 ResBlock.PhiSrc2);
2046
2047 Value *Res =
2048 Builder.CreateSelect(Cmp, ConstantInt::get(Builder.getInt32Ty(), -1),
2049 ConstantInt::get(Builder.getInt32Ty(), 1));
2050
2051 BranchInst *NewBr = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock);
2052 Builder.Insert(NewBr);
2053 PhiRes->addIncoming(Res, ResBlock.BB);
2054}
2055
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00002056unsigned MemCmpExpansion::calculateNumBlocks(unsigned Size) {
2057 unsigned NumBlocks = 0;
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00002058 bool HaveOneByteLoad = false;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002059 unsigned RemainingSize = Size;
2060 unsigned LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2061 while (RemainingSize) {
2062 if (LoadSize == 1)
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00002063 HaveOneByteLoad = true;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002064 NumBlocks += RemainingSize / LoadSize;
2065 RemainingSize = RemainingSize % LoadSize;
2066 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2067 }
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00002068 NumBlocksNonOneByte = HaveOneByteLoad ? (NumBlocks - 1) : NumBlocks;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002069
2070 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp)
2071 NumBlocks = NumBlocks / NumLoadsPerBlock +
2072 (NumBlocks % NumLoadsPerBlock != 0 ? 1 : 0);
2073
2074 return NumBlocks;
2075}
2076
2077void MemCmpExpansion::setupResultBlockPHINodes() {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002078 Type *MaxLoadType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), MaxLoadSize * 8);
2079 Builder.SetInsertPoint(ResBlock.BB);
2080 ResBlock.PhiSrc1 =
2081 Builder.CreatePHI(MaxLoadType, NumBlocksNonOneByte, "phi.src1");
2082 ResBlock.PhiSrc2 =
2083 Builder.CreatePHI(MaxLoadType, NumBlocksNonOneByte, "phi.src2");
2084}
2085
2086void MemCmpExpansion::setupEndBlockPHINodes() {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002087 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front());
2088 PhiRes = Builder.CreatePHI(Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()), 2, "phi.res");
2089}
2090
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002091Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(unsigned Size) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002092 unsigned NumBytesProcessed = 0;
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002093 // This loop populates each of the LoadCmpBlocks with the IR sequence to
2094 // handle multiple loads per block.
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00002095 for (unsigned i = 0; i < NumBlocks; ++i)
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002096 emitLoadCompareBlockMultipleLoads(i, Size, NumBytesProcessed);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002097
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002098 emitMemCmpResultBlock();
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002099 return PhiRes;
2100}
2101
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00002102/// A memcmp expansion that compares equality with 0 and only has one block of
2103/// load and compare can bypass the compare, branch, and phi IR that is required
2104/// in the general case.
2105Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpEqZeroOneBlock(unsigned Size) {
2106 unsigned NumBytesProcessed = 0;
Sanjay Patel9a4ce0c2017-06-27 18:18:42 +00002107 Value *Cmp = getCompareLoadPairs(0, Size, NumBytesProcessed);
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00002108 return Builder.CreateZExt(Cmp, Type::getInt32Ty(CI->getContext()));
2109}
2110
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00002111/// A memcmp expansion that only has one block of load and compare can bypass
2112/// the compare, branch, and phi IR that is required in the general case.
2113Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpOneBlock(unsigned Size) {
2114 assert(NumLoadsPerBlock == 1 && "Only handles one load pair per block");
2115
2116 Type *LoadSizeType = IntegerType::get(CI->getContext(), Size * 8);
2117 Value *Source1 = CI->getArgOperand(0);
2118 Value *Source2 = CI->getArgOperand(1);
2119
2120 // Cast source to LoadSizeType*.
2121 if (Source1->getType() != LoadSizeType)
2122 Source1 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source1, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
2123 if (Source2->getType() != LoadSizeType)
2124 Source2 = Builder.CreateBitCast(Source2, LoadSizeType->getPointerTo());
2125
2126 // Load LoadSizeType from the base address.
2127 Value *LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source1);
2128 Value *LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateLoad(LoadSizeType, Source2);
2129
2130 if (DL.isLittleEndian() && Size != 1) {
2131 Function *Bswap = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(CI->getModule(),
2132 Intrinsic::bswap, LoadSizeType);
2133 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc1);
2134 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateCall(Bswap, LoadSrc2);
2135 }
2136
Sanjay Patelfea731a2017-07-31 18:08:24 +00002137 if (Size < 4) {
2138 // The i8 and i16 cases don't need compares. We zext the loaded values and
2139 // subtract them to get the suitable negative, zero, or positive i32 result.
2140 LoadSrc1 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc1, Builder.getInt32Ty());
2141 LoadSrc2 = Builder.CreateZExt(LoadSrc2, Builder.getInt32Ty());
2142 return Builder.CreateSub(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
2143 }
2144
2145 // The result of memcmp is negative, zero, or positive, so produce that by
2146 // subtracting 2 extended compare bits: sub (ugt, ult).
2147 // If a target prefers to use selects to get -1/0/1, they should be able
2148 // to transform this later. The inverse transform (going from selects to math)
2149 // may not be possible in the DAG because the selects got converted into
2150 // branches before we got there.
2151 Value *CmpUGT = Builder.CreateICmpUGT(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00002152 Value *CmpULT = Builder.CreateICmpULT(LoadSrc1, LoadSrc2);
Sanjay Patelfea731a2017-07-31 18:08:24 +00002153 Value *ZextUGT = Builder.CreateZExt(CmpUGT, Builder.getInt32Ty());
2154 Value *ZextULT = Builder.CreateZExt(CmpULT, Builder.getInt32Ty());
2155 return Builder.CreateSub(ZextUGT, ZextULT);
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00002156}
2157
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002158// This function expands the memcmp call into an inline expansion and returns
2159// the memcmp result.
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002160Value *MemCmpExpansion::getMemCmpExpansion(uint64_t Size) {
Sanjay Patelab0ecc02017-06-07 12:44:36 +00002161 if (IsUsedForZeroCmp)
Sanjay Patele7c50412017-06-08 16:53:18 +00002162 return NumBlocks == 1 ? getMemCmpEqZeroOneBlock(Size) :
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002163 getMemCmpExpansionZeroCase(Size);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002164
Sanjay Patel4b23fa02017-06-27 23:15:01 +00002165 // TODO: Handle more than one load pair per block in getMemCmpOneBlock().
2166 if (NumBlocks == 1 && NumLoadsPerBlock == 1)
2167 return getMemCmpOneBlock(Size);
2168
Sanjay Patelaf515d92017-06-07 14:45:49 +00002169 // This loop calls emitLoadCompareBlock for comparing Size bytes of the two
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002170 // memcmp sources. It starts with loading using the maximum load size set by
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002171 // the target. It processes any remaining bytes using a load size which is the
2172 // next smallest power of 2.
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00002173 unsigned LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2174 unsigned NumBytesToBeProcessed = Size;
Sanjay Patelaf515d92017-06-07 14:45:49 +00002175 unsigned Index = 0;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002176 while (NumBytesToBeProcessed) {
Sanjay Patelaf515d92017-06-07 14:45:49 +00002177 // Calculate how many blocks we can create with the current load size.
Sanjay Patela10f5b62017-06-21 18:06:13 +00002178 unsigned NumBlocks = NumBytesToBeProcessed / LoadSize;
2179 unsigned GEPIndex = (Size - NumBytesToBeProcessed) / LoadSize;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002180 NumBytesToBeProcessed = NumBytesToBeProcessed % LoadSize;
2181
2182 // For each NumBlocks, populate the instruction sequence for loading and
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002183 // comparing LoadSize bytes.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002184 while (NumBlocks--) {
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002185 emitLoadCompareBlock(Index, LoadSize, GEPIndex);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002186 Index++;
2187 GEPIndex++;
2188 }
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002189 // Get the next LoadSize to use.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002190 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2191 }
2192
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002193 emitMemCmpResultBlock();
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002194 return PhiRes;
2195}
2196
2197// This function checks to see if an expansion of memcmp can be generated.
2198// It checks for constant compare size that is less than the max inline size.
2199// If an expansion cannot occur, returns false to leave as a library call.
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002200// Otherwise, the library call is replaced with a new IR instruction sequence.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002201/// We want to transform:
2202/// %call = call signext i32 @memcmp(i8* %0, i8* %1, i64 15)
2203/// To:
2204/// loadbb:
2205/// %0 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2206/// %1 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2207/// %2 = bitcast i8* %1 to i64*
2208/// %3 = bitcast i8* %0 to i64*
2209/// %4 = load i64, i64* %2
2210/// %5 = load i64, i64* %3
2211/// %6 = call i64 @llvm.bswap.i64(i64 %4)
2212/// %7 = call i64 @llvm.bswap.i64(i64 %5)
2213/// %8 = sub i64 %6, %7
2214/// %9 = icmp ne i64 %8, 0
2215/// br i1 %9, label %res_block, label %loadbb1
2216/// res_block: ; preds = %loadbb2,
2217/// %loadbb1, %loadbb
2218/// %phi.src1 = phi i64 [ %6, %loadbb ], [ %22, %loadbb1 ], [ %36, %loadbb2 ]
2219/// %phi.src2 = phi i64 [ %7, %loadbb ], [ %23, %loadbb1 ], [ %37, %loadbb2 ]
2220/// %10 = icmp ult i64 %phi.src1, %phi.src2
2221/// %11 = select i1 %10, i32 -1, i32 1
2222/// br label %endblock
2223/// loadbb1: ; preds = %loadbb
2224/// %12 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2225/// %13 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2226/// %14 = bitcast i8* %13 to i32*
2227/// %15 = bitcast i8* %12 to i32*
2228/// %16 = getelementptr i32, i32* %14, i32 2
2229/// %17 = getelementptr i32, i32* %15, i32 2
2230/// %18 = load i32, i32* %16
2231/// %19 = load i32, i32* %17
2232/// %20 = call i32 @llvm.bswap.i32(i32 %18)
2233/// %21 = call i32 @llvm.bswap.i32(i32 %19)
2234/// %22 = zext i32 %20 to i64
2235/// %23 = zext i32 %21 to i64
2236/// %24 = sub i64 %22, %23
2237/// %25 = icmp ne i64 %24, 0
2238/// br i1 %25, label %res_block, label %loadbb2
2239/// loadbb2: ; preds = %loadbb1
2240/// %26 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2241/// %27 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2242/// %28 = bitcast i8* %27 to i16*
2243/// %29 = bitcast i8* %26 to i16*
2244/// %30 = getelementptr i16, i16* %28, i16 6
2245/// %31 = getelementptr i16, i16* %29, i16 6
2246/// %32 = load i16, i16* %30
2247/// %33 = load i16, i16* %31
2248/// %34 = call i16 @llvm.bswap.i16(i16 %32)
2249/// %35 = call i16 @llvm.bswap.i16(i16 %33)
2250/// %36 = zext i16 %34 to i64
2251/// %37 = zext i16 %35 to i64
2252/// %38 = sub i64 %36, %37
2253/// %39 = icmp ne i64 %38, 0
2254/// br i1 %39, label %res_block, label %loadbb3
2255/// loadbb3: ; preds = %loadbb2
2256/// %40 = bitcast i32* %buffer2 to i8*
2257/// %41 = bitcast i32* %buffer1 to i8*
2258/// %42 = getelementptr i8, i8* %41, i8 14
2259/// %43 = getelementptr i8, i8* %40, i8 14
2260/// %44 = load i8, i8* %42
2261/// %45 = load i8, i8* %43
2262/// %46 = zext i8 %44 to i32
2263/// %47 = zext i8 %45 to i32
2264/// %48 = sub i32 %46, %47
2265/// br label %endblock
2266/// endblock: ; preds = %res_block,
2267/// %loadbb3
2268/// %phi.res = phi i32 [ %48, %loadbb3 ], [ %11, %res_block ]
2269/// ret i32 %phi.res
2270static bool expandMemCmp(CallInst *CI, const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
2271 const TargetLowering *TLI, const DataLayout *DL) {
2272 NumMemCmpCalls++;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002273
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002274 // TTI call to check if target would like to expand memcmp. Also, get the
2275 // MaxLoadSize.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002276 unsigned MaxLoadSize;
2277 if (!TTI->expandMemCmp(CI, MaxLoadSize))
2278 return false;
2279
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002280 // Early exit from expansion if -Oz.
Sanjay Patel4137d512017-06-07 14:29:52 +00002281 if (CI->getFunction()->optForMinSize())
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002282 return false;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002283
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002284 // Early exit from expansion if size is not a constant.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002285 ConstantInt *SizeCast = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CI->getArgOperand(2));
2286 if (!SizeCast) {
2287 NumMemCmpNotConstant++;
2288 return false;
2289 }
2290
Sanjay Patel4dbdd472017-08-01 17:24:54 +00002291 // Scale the max size down if the target can load more bytes than we need.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002292 uint64_t SizeVal = SizeCast->getZExtValue();
Sanjay Patel4dbdd472017-08-01 17:24:54 +00002293 if (MaxLoadSize > SizeVal)
2294 MaxLoadSize = 1 << SizeCast->getValue().logBase2();
2295
2296 // Calculate how many load pairs are needed for the constant size.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002297 unsigned NumLoads = 0;
2298 unsigned RemainingSize = SizeVal;
2299 unsigned LoadSize = MaxLoadSize;
2300 while (RemainingSize) {
2301 NumLoads += RemainingSize / LoadSize;
2302 RemainingSize = RemainingSize % LoadSize;
2303 LoadSize = LoadSize / 2;
2304 }
2305
Sanjay Patel4dbdd472017-08-01 17:24:54 +00002306 // Don't expand if this will require more loads than desired by the target.
Sanjay Patel4137d512017-06-07 14:29:52 +00002307 if (NumLoads > TLI->getMaxExpandSizeMemcmp(CI->getFunction()->optForSize())) {
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002308 NumMemCmpGreaterThanMax++;
2309 return false;
2310 }
2311
2312 NumMemCmpInlined++;
2313
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002314 // MemCmpHelper object creates and sets up basic blocks required for
2315 // expanding memcmp with size SizeVal.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002316 unsigned NumLoadsPerBlock = MemCmpNumLoadsPerBlock;
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002317 MemCmpExpansion MemCmpHelper(CI, SizeVal, MaxLoadSize, NumLoadsPerBlock, *DL);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002318
Sanjay Patel2843cad2017-06-09 23:01:05 +00002319 Value *Res = MemCmpHelper.getMemCmpExpansion(SizeVal);
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002320
Sanjay Patelb4b7df92017-06-06 20:30:47 +00002321 // Replace call with result of expansion and erase call.
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002322 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Res);
2323 CI->eraseFromParent();
2324
2325 return true;
2326}
2327
Sanjay Patel3b8974b2017-06-08 20:00:09 +00002328bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002329 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002330
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002331 // Lower inline assembly if we can.
2332 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to
2333 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now.
2334 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) {
2335 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) {
2336 // Avoid invalidating the iterator.
2337 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
2338 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause
2339 // reuse before a value is defined.
2340 SunkAddrs.clear();
2341 return true;
2342 }
2343 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002344 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI))
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00002345 return true;
2346 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002347
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002348 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good
2349 // idea
2350 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002351 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) {
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002352 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
2353 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and
2354 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes
2355 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and
2356 // if size - offset meets the size threshold.
2357 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
2358 continue;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002359 APInt Offset(DL->getPointerSizeInBits(
2360 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()),
2361 0);
2362 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002363 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue();
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002364 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0)
2365 continue;
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002366 AllocaInst *AI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002367 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
2368 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002369 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002370 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this
2371 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and
2372 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is
2373 // forbidden.
2374 GlobalVariable *GV;
James Y Knightac03dca2016-01-15 16:33:06 +00002375 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() &&
Tim Northover918f0502016-07-18 18:28:52 +00002376 GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign &&
Manuel Jacob5f6eaac2016-01-16 20:30:46 +00002377 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >=
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002378 MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00002379 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002380 }
2381 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the
2382 // alignment
2383 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002384 unsigned Align = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002385 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI))
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002386 Align = std::min(Align, getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL));
Pete Cooper67cf9a72015-11-19 05:56:52 +00002387 if (Align > MI->getAlignment())
2388 MI->setAlignment(ConstantInt::get(MI->getAlignmentType(), Align));
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00002389 }
2390 }
2391
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00002392 // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the
2393 // cold block. This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to
2394 // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation
2395 // into their uses. TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data
2396 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
2397 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
2398 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
2399 continue;
2400 unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2401 return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS);
2402 }
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00002403
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002404 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002405 if (II) {
2406 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
2407 default: break;
2408 case Intrinsic::objectsize: {
2409 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.*
George Burgess IV3f089142016-12-20 23:46:36 +00002410 ConstantInt *RetVal =
2411 lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002412 // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00002413 // invalidate our iterator. Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case
2414 // this
Sanjoy Das2cbeb002017-04-26 16:37:05 +00002415 // happens.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00002416 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00002417 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00002418
Sanjay Patel545a4562016-01-20 18:59:16 +00002419 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr);
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00002420
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002421 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
2422 // start of the block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00002423 if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002424 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
2425 SunkAddrs.clear();
2426 }
2427 return true;
Chris Lattner86d56c62011-01-18 20:53:04 +00002428 }
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00002429 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr:
2430 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: {
2431 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0));
2432 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() ||
2433 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent())
2434 return false;
2435 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it.
2436 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002437 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
2438 // optimizations don't touch it.
2439 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal);
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00002440 return true;
2441 }
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00002442 case Intrinsic::invariant_group_barrier:
2443 II->replaceAllUsesWith(II->getArgOperand(0));
2444 II->eraseFromParent();
2445 return true;
Sanjay Patel4699b8a2015-11-19 16:37:10 +00002446
2447 case Intrinsic::cttz:
2448 case Intrinsic::ctlz:
2449 // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it.
2450 return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002451 }
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002452
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002453 if (TLI) {
2454 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps;
2455 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenault1672b1b2017-02-08 07:09:03 +00002456 if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy))
2457 while (!PtrOps.empty()) {
2458 Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val();
2459 unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2460 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS))
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002461 return true;
Matt Arsenault1672b1b2017-02-08 07:09:03 +00002462 }
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00002463 }
Pete Cooper615fd892012-03-13 20:59:56 +00002464 }
2465
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002466 // From here on out we're working with named functions.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002467 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false;
Devang Patel0da52502011-05-26 21:51:06 +00002468
Benjamin Kramer7b88a492010-03-12 09:27:41 +00002469 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar
2470 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002471 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default
2472 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002473 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true);
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002474 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) {
2475 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2476 CI->eraseFromParent();
2477 return true;
2478 }
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002479
2480 LibFunc Func;
Sanjay Patel5e370852017-06-08 19:47:25 +00002481 if (TLInfo->getLibFunc(ImmutableCallSite(CI), Func) &&
2482 Func == LibFunc_memcmp && expandMemCmp(CI, TTI, TLI, DL)) {
2483 ModifiedDT = true;
2484 return true;
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00002485 }
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00002486 return false;
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00002487}
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00002488
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002489/// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor
2490/// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is:
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002491/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002492/// bb0:
2493/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
2494/// br label %return
2495/// bb1:
2496/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
2497/// br label %return
2498/// bb2:
2499/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
2500/// br label %return
2501/// return:
2502/// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ]
2503/// ret i32 %retval
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002504/// @endcode
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002505///
2506/// =>
2507///
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002508/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002509/// bb0:
2510/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
2511/// ret i32 %tmp0
2512/// bb1:
2513/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
2514/// ret i32 %tmp1
2515/// bb2:
2516/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
2517/// ret i32 %tmp2
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00002518/// @endcode
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002519bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) {
Cameron Zwarich47e71752011-03-24 04:51:51 +00002520 if (!TLI)
2521 return false;
2522
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002523 ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator());
2524 if (!RetI)
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00002525 return false;
2526
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002527 PHINode *PN = nullptr;
2528 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002529 Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue();
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00002530 if (V) {
2531 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V);
2532 if (BCI)
2533 V = BCI->getOperand(0);
2534
2535 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V);
2536 if (!PN)
2537 return false;
2538 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002539
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002540 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB)
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002541 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002542
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002543 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the
2544 // return is the first instruction in the block.
2545 if (PN) {
2546 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
2547 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI));
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00002548 if (&*BI == BCI)
2549 // Also skip over the bitcast.
2550 ++BI;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002551 if (&*BI != RetI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002552 return false;
2553 } else {
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002554 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
2555 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI;
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002556 if (&*BI != RetI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002557 return false;
2558 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002559
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002560 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail
2561 /// call.
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002562 const Function *F = BB->getParent();
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002563 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002564 if (PN) {
2565 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
2566 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I));
2567 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call.
2568 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) &&
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002569 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
2570 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002571 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
2572 }
2573 } else {
2574 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002575 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00002576 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002577 continue;
2578
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002579 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList();
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002580 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin();
2581 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend();
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002582 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI));
2583 if (RI == RE)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002584 continue;
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00002585
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002586 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI);
Michael Kupersteinf79af6f2016-09-08 00:48:37 +00002587 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) &&
2588 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00002589 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
2590 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002591 }
2592
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002593 bool Changed = false;
2594 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) {
2595 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i];
2596 CallSite CS(CI);
2597
2598 // Conservatively require the attributes of the call to match those of the
2599 // return. Ignore noalias because it doesn't affect the call sequence.
Reid Klecknerb5180542017-03-21 16:57:19 +00002600 AttributeList CalleeAttrs = CS.getAttributes();
2601 if (AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeList::ReturnIndex)
2602 .removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias) !=
2603 AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeList::ReturnIndex)
2604 .removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002605 continue;
2606
2607 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to
2608 // the return block.
2609 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent();
2610 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator());
2611 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
2612 continue;
2613
2614 // Duplicate the return into CallBB.
Michael Kuperstein71321562016-09-07 20:29:49 +00002615 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB);
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +00002616 ModifiedDT = Changed = true;
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002617 ++NumRetsDup;
2618 }
2619
2620 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +00002621 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00002622 BB->eraseFromParent();
2623
2624 return Changed;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00002625}
2626
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00002627//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00002628// Memory Optimization
2629//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
2630
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002631namespace {
2632
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002633/// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002634/// which holds actual Value*'s for register values.
Chandler Carruth95f83e02013-01-07 15:14:13 +00002635struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002636 Value *BaseReg;
2637 Value *ScaledReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002638 ExtAddrMode() : BaseReg(nullptr), ScaledReg(nullptr) {}
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002639 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
2640 void dump() const;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002641
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002642 bool operator==(const ExtAddrMode& O) const {
2643 return (BaseReg == O.BaseReg) && (ScaledReg == O.ScaledReg) &&
2644 (BaseGV == O.BaseGV) && (BaseOffs == O.BaseOffs) &&
2645 (HasBaseReg == O.HasBaseReg) && (Scale == O.Scale);
2646 }
2647};
2648
Eli Friedmanc1f1f852013-09-10 23:09:24 +00002649#ifndef NDEBUG
2650static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) {
2651 AM.print(OS);
2652 return OS;
2653}
2654#endif
2655
Florian Hahn6b3216a2017-07-31 10:07:49 +00002656#if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002657void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
2658 bool NeedPlus = false;
2659 OS << "[";
2660 if (BaseGV) {
2661 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2662 << "GV:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002663 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002664 NeedPlus = true;
2665 }
2666
Richard Trieuc0f91212014-05-30 03:15:17 +00002667 if (BaseOffs) {
2668 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2669 << BaseOffs;
2670 NeedPlus = true;
2671 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002672
2673 if (BaseReg) {
2674 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2675 << "Base:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002676 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002677 NeedPlus = true;
2678 }
2679 if (Scale) {
2680 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
2681 << Scale << "*";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00002682 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002683 }
2684
2685 OS << ']';
2686}
2687
Yaron Kereneb2a2542016-01-29 20:50:44 +00002688LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002689 print(dbgs());
2690 dbgs() << '\n';
2691}
2692#endif
2693
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002694/// \brief This class provides transaction based operation on the IR.
2695/// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and
2696/// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called.
2697class TypePromotionTransaction {
2698
2699 /// \brief This represents the common interface of the individual transaction.
2700 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on
2701 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction.
2702 class TypePromotionAction {
2703 protected:
2704 /// The Instruction modified.
2705 Instruction *Inst;
2706
2707 public:
2708 /// \brief Constructor of the action.
2709 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR.
2710 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {}
2711
2712 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() {}
2713
2714 /// \brief Undo the modification done by this action.
2715 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was
2716 /// before this action was applied.
2717 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same
2718 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied.
2719 virtual void undo() = 0;
2720
2721 /// \brief Advocate every change made by this action.
2722 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important
2723 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever.
2724 virtual void commit() {
2725 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything.
2726 }
2727 };
2728
2729 /// \brief Utility to remember the position of an instruction.
2730 class InsertionHandler {
2731 /// Position of an instruction.
2732 /// Either an instruction:
2733 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used.
2734 /// - Has a previous instructon: PrevInst is used.
2735 union {
2736 Instruction *PrevInst;
2737 BasicBlock *BB;
2738 } Point;
2739 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction.
2740 bool HasPrevInstruction;
2741
2742 public:
2743 /// \brief Record the position of \p Inst.
2744 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002745 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002746 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin()));
2747 if (HasPrevInstruction)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002748 Point.PrevInst = &*--It;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002749 else
2750 Point.BB = Inst->getParent();
2751 }
2752
2753 /// \brief Insert \p Inst at the recorded position.
2754 void insert(Instruction *Inst) {
2755 if (HasPrevInstruction) {
2756 if (Inst->getParent())
2757 Inst->removeFromParent();
2758 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst);
2759 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00002760 Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002761 if (Inst->getParent())
2762 Inst->moveBefore(Position);
2763 else
2764 Inst->insertBefore(Position);
2765 }
2766 }
2767 };
2768
2769 /// \brief Move an instruction before another.
2770 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction {
2771 /// Original position of the instruction.
2772 InsertionHandler Position;
2773
2774 public:
2775 /// \brief Move \p Inst before \p Before.
2776 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before)
2777 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) {
2778 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before << "\n");
2779 Inst->moveBefore(Before);
2780 }
2781
2782 /// \brief Move the instruction back to its original position.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002783 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n");
2785 Position.insert(Inst);
2786 }
2787 };
2788
2789 /// \brief Set the operand of an instruction with a new value.
2790 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction {
2791 /// Original operand of the instruction.
2792 Value *Origin;
2793 /// Index of the modified instruction.
2794 unsigned Idx;
2795
2796 public:
2797 /// \brief Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal.
2798 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal)
2799 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) {
2800 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n"
2801 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n"
2802 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n");
2803 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx);
2804 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal);
2805 }
2806
2807 /// \brief Restore the original value of the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002808 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002809 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n"
2810 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n"
2811 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n");
2812 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin);
2813 }
2814 };
2815
2816 /// \brief Hide the operands of an instruction.
2817 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands.
2818 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction {
2819 /// The list of original operands.
2820 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues;
2821
2822 public:
2823 /// \brief Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst.
2824 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2825 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2826 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands();
2827 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds);
2828 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) {
2829 // Save the current operand.
2830 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It);
2831 OriginalValues.push_back(Val);
2832 // Set a dummy one.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00002833 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002834 // that we are not willing to pay.
2835 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType()));
2836 }
2837 }
2838
2839 /// \brief Restore the original list of uses.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002840 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002841 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
2842 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It)
2843 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]);
2844 }
2845 };
2846
2847 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction.
2848 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002849 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002850 public:
2851 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2852 /// result.
2853 /// trunc Opnd to Ty.
2854 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) {
2855 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002856 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2857 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002858 }
2859
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002860 /// \brief Get the built value.
2861 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002862
2863 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002864 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002865 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2866 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2867 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002868 }
2869 };
2870
2871 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction.
2872 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002873 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002874 public:
2875 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2876 /// result.
2877 /// sext Opnd to Ty.
2878 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002879 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002880 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002881 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2882 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002883 }
2884
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002885 /// \brief Get the built value.
2886 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002887
2888 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002889 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002890 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2891 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2892 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002893 }
2894 };
2895
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002896 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction.
2897 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002898 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002899 public:
2900 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
2901 /// result.
2902 /// zext Opnd to Ty.
2903 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002904 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002905 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002906 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
2907 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002908 }
2909
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002910 /// \brief Get the built value.
2911 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002912
2913 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
2914 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002915 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
2916 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
2917 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002918 }
2919 };
2920
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002921 /// \brief Mutate an instruction to another type.
2922 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction {
2923 /// Record the original type.
2924 Type *OrigTy;
2925
2926 public:
2927 /// \brief Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy.
2928 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy)
2929 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) {
2930 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy
2931 << "\n");
2932 Inst->mutateType(NewTy);
2933 }
2934
2935 /// \brief Mutate the instruction back to its original type.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002936 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002937 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy
2938 << "\n");
2939 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy);
2940 }
2941 };
2942
2943 /// \brief Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction.
2944 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction {
2945 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses.
2946 struct InstructionAndIdx {
2947 /// The instruction using the instruction.
2948 Instruction *Inst;
2949 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst.
2950 unsigned Idx;
2951 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx)
2952 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {}
2953 };
2954
2955 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index).
2956 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses;
2957 typedef SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator use_iterator;
2958
2959 public:
2960 /// \brief Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New.
2961 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
2962 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New
2963 << "\n");
2964 // Record the original uses.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002965 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) {
2966 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
2967 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002968 }
2969 // Now, we can replace the uses.
2970 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New);
2971 }
2972
2973 /// \brief Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00002974 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002975 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n");
2976 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(),
2977 EndIt = OriginalUses.end();
2978 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) {
2979 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst);
2980 }
2981 }
2982 };
2983
2984 /// \brief Remove an instruction from the IR.
2985 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction {
2986 /// Original position of the instruction.
2987 InsertionHandler Inserter;
2988 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other
2989 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed.
2990 OperandsHider Hider;
2991 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any.
2992 UsesReplacer *Replacer;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002993 /// Keep track of instructions removed.
2994 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002995
2996 public:
2997 /// \brief Remove all reference of \p Inst and optinally replace all its
2998 /// uses with New.
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00002999 /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003000 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003001 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts,
3002 Value *New = nullptr)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003003 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst),
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003004 Replacer(nullptr), RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003005 if (New)
3006 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New);
3007 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003008 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
3009 /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing
3010 /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the
3011 /// removed instructions during promotion.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003012 Inst->removeFromParent();
3013 }
3014
Alexander Kornienkof817c1c2015-04-11 02:11:45 +00003015 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003016
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003017 /// \brief Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if
3018 /// new value was provided when build this action.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00003019 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003020 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
3021 Inserter.insert(Inst);
3022 if (Replacer)
3023 Replacer->undo();
3024 Hider.undo();
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003025 RemovedInsts.erase(Inst);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003026 }
3027 };
3028
3029public:
3030 /// Restoration point.
3031 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator
3032 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer.
3033 typedef const TypePromotionAction *ConstRestorationPt;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003034
3035 TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts)
3036 : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {}
3037
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003038 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction.
3039 void commit();
3040 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point.
3041 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point);
3042 /// Get the current restoration point.
3043 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const;
3044
3045 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback.
3046 /// @{
3047 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand.
3048 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal);
3049 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003050 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003051 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith.
3052 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New);
3053 /// Same as Value::mutateType.
3054 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy);
3055 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003056 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003057 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003058 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003059 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003060 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003061 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore.
3062 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before);
3063 /// @}
3064
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003065private:
3066 /// The ordered list of actions made so far.
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003067 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions;
3068 typedef SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator CommitPt;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003069 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003070};
3071
3072void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx,
3073 Value *NewVal) {
3074 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003075 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>(Inst, Idx, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003076}
3077
3078void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst,
3079 Value *NewVal) {
3080 Actions.push_back(
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00003081 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>(Inst,
3082 RemovedInsts, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003083}
3084
3085void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst,
3086 Value *New) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003087 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003088}
3089
3090void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003091 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003092}
3093
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003094Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd,
3095 Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003096 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003097 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003098 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003099 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003100}
3101
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003102Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst,
3103 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003104 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003105 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003106 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003107 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003108}
3109
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003110Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst,
3111 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003112 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003113 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003114 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003115 return Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003116}
3117
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003118void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst,
3119 Instruction *Before) {
3120 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003121 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>(Inst, Before));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003122}
3123
3124TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt
3125TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003126 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003127}
3128
3129void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() {
3130 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt;
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003131 ++It)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003132 (*It)->commit();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003133 Actions.clear();
3134}
3135
3136void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback(
3137 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00003138 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) {
3139 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003140 Curr->undo();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003141 }
3142}
3143
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003144/// \brief A helper class for matching addressing modes.
3145///
3146/// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes.
3147class AddressingModeMatcher {
3148 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts;
3149 const TargetLowering &TLI;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003150 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003151 const DataLayout &DL;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003152
3153 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and
3154 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for.
3155 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003156 unsigned AddrSpace;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003157 Instruction *MemoryInst;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003158
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003159 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003160 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff.
3161 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003162
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003163 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations.
3164 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003165 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion.
3166 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts;
3167 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
3168 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT;
3169
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003170 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks.
3171 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003172 bool IgnoreProfitability;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003173
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00003174 AddressingModeMatcher(SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003175 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3176 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI,
3177 Type *AT, unsigned AS,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003178 Instruction *MI, ExtAddrMode &AM,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003179 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003180 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3181 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT)
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003182 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI),
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003183 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS),
3184 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts),
3185 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003186 IgnoreProfitability = false;
3187 }
3188public:
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003189
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003190 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003191 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved
3192 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003193 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003194 /// optimizations.
3195 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
3196 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003197 static ExtAddrMode Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003198 Instruction *MemoryInst,
3199 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003200 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3201 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003202 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003203 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3204 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003205 ExtAddrMode Result;
3206
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00003207 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI,
3208 AccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003209 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003210 PromotedInsts, TPT).matchAddr(V, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003211 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
3212 return Result;
3213 }
3214private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003215 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth);
3216 bool matchAddr(Value *V, unsigned Depth);
3217 bool matchOperationAddr(User *Operation, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth,
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003218 bool *MovedAway = nullptr);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003219 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003220 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
3221 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003222 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2);
3223 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost,
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003224 Value *PromotedOperand) const;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003225};
3226
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003227/// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003228/// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target,
3229/// false if not.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003230bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003231 unsigned Depth) {
3232 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing
3233 // mode. Just process that directly.
3234 if (Scale == 1)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003235 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003236
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003237 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this.
3238 if (Scale == 0)
3239 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003240
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003241 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we
3242 // need an available scale field.
3243 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg)
3244 return false;
3245
3246 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode;
3247
3248 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like
3249 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8].
3250 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale;
3251 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg;
3252
3253 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003254 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003255 return false;
3256
3257 // It was legal, so commit it.
3258 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003259
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003260 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now
3261 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding
3262 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003263 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003264 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr.
3265 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) {
3266 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS;
3267 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003268
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003269 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded
3270 // this instruction.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003271 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003272 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg));
3273 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
3274 return true;
3275 }
3276 }
3277
3278 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have.
3279 return true;
3280}
3281
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003282/// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation
3283/// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it.
3284/// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003285/// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can.
3286static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) {
3287 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
3288 case Instruction::BitCast:
Eli Benderskyf13a0562014-05-22 00:02:52 +00003289 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003290 // Don't touch identity bitcasts.
3291 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType())
3292 return false;
3293 return I->getType()->isPointerTy() || I->getType()->isIntegerTy();
3294 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3295 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
3296 return true;
3297 case Instruction::IntToPtr:
3298 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable.
3299 return true;
3300 case Instruction::Add:
3301 return true;
3302 case Instruction::Mul:
3303 case Instruction::Shl:
3304 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3305 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
3306 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
3307 return true;
3308 default:
3309 return false;
3310 }
3311}
3312
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003313/// \brief Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI.
3314/// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion.
3315/// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed
3316/// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003317static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI,
3318 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003319 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val);
3320 if (!PromotedInst)
3321 return false;
3322 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode());
3323 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion.
3324 if (!ISDOpcode)
3325 return true;
3326 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not.
3327 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003328 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType()));
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003329}
3330
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003331/// \brief Hepler class to perform type promotion.
3332class TypePromotionHelper {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003333 /// \brief Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension
3334 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by
3335 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst.
3336 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003337 /// In other words, check if:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003338 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003339 /// #1 Promotion applies:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003340 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...).
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003341 /// #2 Operand reuses:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003342 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003343 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003344 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType,
3345 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003346
3347 /// \brief Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when
3348 /// promoting \p Inst.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003349 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) {
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00003350 return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003351 }
3352
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003353 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003354 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003355 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003356 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003357 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003358 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3359 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003360 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003361 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003362 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
3363 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003364 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003365 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003366 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003367
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003368 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003369 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext.
3370 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003371 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003372 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003373 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
3374 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003375 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003376 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003377 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext,
3378 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3379 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3380 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3381 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3382 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3383 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003384
3385 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003386 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther(
3387 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3388 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3389 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3390 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3391 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3392 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003393 }
3394
3395 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003396 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther(
3397 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
3398 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
3399 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
3400 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3401 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
3402 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003403 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003404
3405public:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003406 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext.
3407 typedef Value *(*Action)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003408 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3409 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003410 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003411 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
3412 const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003413 /// \brief Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the approriate
3414 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003415 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current
3416 /// sign extension.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003417 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the
3418 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003419 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare
3420 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove.
3421 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003422 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003423 const TargetLowering &TLI,
3424 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts);
3425};
3426
3427bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst,
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003428 Type *ConsideredExtType,
3429 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
3430 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003431 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet.
3432 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we
3433 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such.
3434 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy())
3435 return false;
3436
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003437 // We can always get through zext.
3438 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
3439 return true;
3440
3441 // sext(sext) is ok too.
3442 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003443 return true;
3444
3445 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the
3446 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag.
3447 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst);
3448 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) &&
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003449 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) ||
3450 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap())))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003451 return true;
3452
3453 // Check if we can do the following simplification.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003454 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003455 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst))
3456 return false;
3457
3458 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003459 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003460 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003461 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
3462 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
3463 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth())
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003464 return false;
3465
3466 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have
3467 // any information on the dropped bits.
3468 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic).
3469 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal);
3470 if (!Opnd)
3471 return false;
3472
3473 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003474 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of
3475 // the extension.
3476 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003477 const Type *OpndType;
3478 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd);
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +00003479 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == IsSExt)
3480 OpndType = It->second.getPointer();
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003481 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd)))
3482 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003483 else
3484 return false;
3485
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003486 // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits.
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00003487 return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >=
3488 OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003489}
3490
3491TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003492 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003493 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003494 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) &&
3495 "Unexpected instruction type");
3496 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
3497 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType();
3498 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext);
3499 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003500 // get through.
3501 // If it, check we can get through.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003502 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003503 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003504
3505 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare.
3506 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be
3507 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003508 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003509 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003510
3511 // SExt or Trunc instructions.
3512 // Return the related handler.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003513 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) ||
3514 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003515 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003516
3517 // Regular instruction.
3518 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003519 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType()))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003520 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003521 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003522}
3523
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003524Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003525 llvm::Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003526 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003527 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003528 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003529 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
3530 // get through it and this method should not be called.
3531 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003532 Value *ExtVal = SExt;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003533 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003534 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003535 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003536 // => zext(opnd).
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003537 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003538 Value *ZExt =
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003539 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType());
3540 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt);
3541 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003542 ExtVal = ZExt;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003543 } else {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003544 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd))
3545 // => z|sext(opnd).
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00003546 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0));
3547 }
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003548 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003549
3550 // Remove dead code.
3551 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty())
3552 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd);
3553
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00003554 // Check if the extension is still needed.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003555 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003556 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) {
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003557 if (ExtInst) {
3558 if (Exts)
3559 Exts->push_back(ExtInst);
3560 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt;
3561 }
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003562 return ExtVal;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003563 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003564
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00003565 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty.
3566 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst.
3567 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0);
3568 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003569 return NextVal;
3570}
3571
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003572Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther(
3573 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003574 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003575 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003576 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI,
3577 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003578 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003579 // get through it and this method should not be called.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003580 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003581 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003582 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) {
3583 // ExtOpnd will be promoted.
3584 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003585 // promoted version.
3586 // Create the truncate now.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003587 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType());
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003588 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) {
3589 ITrunc->removeFromParent();
3590 // Insert it just after the definition.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003591 ITrunc->insertAfter(ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003592 if (Truncs)
3593 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00003594 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003595
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003596 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc);
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003597 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003598 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003599 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003600 }
3601
3602 // Get through the Instruction:
3603 // 1. Update its type.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003604 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst.
3605 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003606
3607 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion.
3608 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003609 PromotedInsts.insert(std::pair<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>(
3610 ExtOpnd, TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), IsSExt)));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003611 // Step #1.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003612 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType());
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003613 // Step #2.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003614 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003615 // Step #3.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003616 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003617
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003618 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n");
3619 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003620 ++OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003621 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n');
3622 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() ||
3623 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003624 DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n");
3625 continue;
3626 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003627 // Check if we can statically extend the operand.
3628 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003629 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003630 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3631 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
3632 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth)
3633 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth);
3634 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003635 continue;
3636 }
3637 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them.
3638 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003639 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
3640 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003641 continue;
3642 }
3643
3644 // Otherwise we have to explicity sign extend the operand.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003645 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand.
3646 if (!ExtForOpnd) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003647 // If yes, create a new one.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003648 DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n");
Quentin Colombet84f89cc2014-12-22 18:11:52 +00003649 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType())
3650 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType());
3651 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) {
3652 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd);
3653 continue;
3654 }
3655 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003656 }
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003657 if (Exts)
3658 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003659 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003660
3661 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003662 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd);
3663 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003664 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003665 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003666 ExtForOpnd = nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003667 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003668 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) {
3669 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n");
3670 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003671 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003672 return ExtOpnd;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003673}
3674
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003675/// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003676/// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the
3677/// promotion.
3678/// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion
3679/// plus the number of instructions that have been
3680/// matched in the addressing mode the promotion.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003681/// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted.
3682/// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003683bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable(
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003684 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const {
3685 DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost << '\n');
3686 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the
3687 // old extension plus what we folded.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003688 // This is not profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003689 if (NewCost > OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003690 return false;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003691 if (NewCost < OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003692 return true;
3693 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in
3694 // loads for instance.
3695 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003696 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand);
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003697}
3698
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003699/// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003700/// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003701/// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003702/// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or
3703/// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success.
3704/// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing
3705/// because it has been moved away.
3706/// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions.
3707/// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away.
3708/// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must
3709/// not be referenced anymore.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003710bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003711 unsigned Depth,
3712 bool *MovedAway) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003713 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees.
3714 if (Depth >= 5) return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003715
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003716 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place.
3717 if (MovedAway)
3718 *MovedAway = false;
3719
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003720 switch (Opcode) {
3721 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
3722 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003723 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003724 case Instruction::IntToPtr: {
3725 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3726 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003727 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003728 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003729 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003730 return false;
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003731 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003732 case Instruction::BitCast:
3733 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is
3734 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something).
3735 if ((AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isPointerTy() ||
3736 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntegerTy()) &&
3737 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR,
3738 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it
3739 // is doing.
3740 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType())
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003741 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003742 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00003743 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: {
3744 unsigned SrcAS
3745 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3746 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
3747 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003748 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00003749 return false;
3750 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003751 case Instruction::Add: {
3752 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win.
3753 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3754 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003755 // Start a transaction at this point.
3756 // The LHS may match but not the RHS.
3757 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially
3758 // matched operation.
3759 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3760 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3761
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003762 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) &&
3763 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003764 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003765
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003766 // Restore the old addr mode info.
3767 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3768 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003769 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003770
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003771 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003772 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) &&
3773 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003774 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003775
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003776 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in.
3777 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3778 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003779 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003780 break;
3781 }
3782 //case Instruction::Or:
3783 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD.
3784 //break;
3785 case Instruction::Mul:
3786 case Instruction::Shl: {
3787 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
3788 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1));
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00003789 if (!RHS)
3790 return false;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003791 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue();
3792 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl)
3793 Scale = 1LL << Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003794
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003795 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003796 }
3797 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: {
3798 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most
3799 // one variable offset.
3800 int VariableOperand = -1;
3801 unsigned VariableScale = 0;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003802
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003803 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003804 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst);
3805 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) {
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00003806 if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003807 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003808 unsigned Idx =
3809 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue();
3810 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx);
3811 } else {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003812 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003813 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) {
3814 ConstantOffset += CI->getSExtValue()*TypeSize;
3815 } else if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything.
3816 // We only allow one variable index at the moment.
3817 if (VariableOperand != -1)
3818 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003819
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003820 // Remember the variable index.
3821 VariableOperand = i;
3822 VariableScale = TypeSize;
3823 }
3824 }
3825 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003826
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003827 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case,
3828 // just add it to the disp field and check validity.
3829 if (VariableOperand == -1) {
3830 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003831 if (ConstantOffset == 0 ||
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003832 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003833 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003834 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003835 return true;
3836 }
3837 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset;
3838 return false;
3839 }
3840
3841 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match.
3842 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3843 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3844
3845 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target.
3846 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
3847
3848 // Match the base operand of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003849 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003850 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register.
3851 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
3852 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3853 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3854 return false;
3855 }
3856 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3857 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3858 }
3859
3860 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003861 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003862 Depth)) {
3863 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register
3864 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale.
3865 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3866 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3867 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg)
3868 return false;
3869 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
3870 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
3871 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003872 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand),
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003873 VariableScale, Depth)) {
3874 // If even that didn't work, bail.
3875 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3876 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3877 return false;
3878 }
3879 }
3880
3881 return true;
3882 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003883 case Instruction::SExt:
3884 case Instruction::ZExt: {
3885 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst);
3886 if (!Ext)
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00003887 return false;
Sanjay Patelab60d042014-07-16 21:08:10 +00003888
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003889 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003890 // Ask for a method for doing so.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003891 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003892 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003893 if (!TPH)
3894 return false;
3895
3896 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3897 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003898 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0;
3899 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003900 Value *PromotedOperand =
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003901 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003902 // SExt has been moved away.
3903 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is
3904 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point.
3905 // E.g.,
3906 // op = add opnd, 1
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003907 // idx = ext op
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003908 // addr = gep base, idx
3909 // is now:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00003910 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003911 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls)
3912 // addr = gep base, op <- match
3913 if (MovedAway)
3914 *MovedAway = true;
3915
3916 assert(PromotedOperand &&
3917 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
3918
3919 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3920 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3921
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003922 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) ||
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003923 // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003924 // instructions.
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003925 // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003926 // what we have saved in the addressing mode.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003927 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003928 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize),
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00003929 PromotedOperand)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003930 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3931 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
3932 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n");
3933 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3934 return false;
3935 }
3936 return true;
3937 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003938 }
3939 return false;
3940}
3941
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003942/// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode.
3943/// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode
3944/// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t
3945/// for the target.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003946///
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003947bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003948 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching
3949 // fails.
3950 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3951 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003952 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) {
3953 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target.
3954 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue();
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003955 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003956 return true;
3957 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue();
3958 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) {
3959 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003960 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003961 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00003962 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003963 return true;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003964 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003965 }
3966 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) {
3967 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
3968 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
3969
3970 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003971 bool MovedAway = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003972 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) {
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00003973 // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003974 // to check here.
3975 if (MovedAway)
3976 return true;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003977 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually
3978 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing
3979 // register pressure too much.
3980 if (I->hasOneUse() ||
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003981 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003982 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I);
3983 return true;
3984 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003985
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003986 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back.
3987 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I;
3988 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
3989 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003990 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003991 }
3992 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) {
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003993 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003994 return true;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003995 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003996 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) {
3997 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode.
3998 return true;
3999 }
4000
4001 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :)
4002 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
4003 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
4004 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr;
4005 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r].
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00004006 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004007 return true;
4008 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004009 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004010 }
4011
4012 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r].
4013 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) {
4014 AddrMode.Scale = 1;
4015 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00004016 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004017 return true;
4018 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004019 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004020 }
4021 // Couldn't match.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004022 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004023 return false;
4024}
4025
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004026/// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due
4027/// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004028static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal,
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004029 const TargetLowering &TLI,
4030 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) {
Sanjay Patel4137d512017-06-07 14:29:52 +00004031 const Function *F = CI->getFunction();
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00004032 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004033 TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI,
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00004034 ImmutableCallSite(CI));
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004035
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004036 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4037 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004038
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004039 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004040 TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004041
4042 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory
4043 // operand, we can't fold it!
4044 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal &&
4045 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory ||
4046 !OpInfo.isIndirect))
4047 return false;
4048 }
4049
4050 return true;
4051}
4052
Benjamin Kramerfc638c12017-07-24 16:18:09 +00004053// Max number of memory uses to look at before aborting the search to conserve
4054// compile time.
4055static constexpr int MaxMemoryUsesToScan = 20;
4056
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004057/// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use.
4058/// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004059/// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00004060static bool FindAllMemoryUses(
4061 Instruction *I,
4062 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses,
Benjamin Kramerfc638c12017-07-24 16:18:09 +00004063 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetLowering &TLI,
4064 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, int SeenInsts = 0) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004065 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004066 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004067 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004068
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004069 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out.
4070 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I))
4071 return true;
4072
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004073 const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize();
4074
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004075 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004076 for (Use &U : I->uses()) {
Benjamin Kramerfc638c12017-07-24 16:18:09 +00004077 // Conservatively return true if we're seeing a large number or a deep chain
4078 // of users. This avoids excessive compilation times in pathological cases.
4079 if (SeenInsts++ >= MaxMemoryUsesToScan)
4080 return true;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004081
Benjamin Kramerfc638c12017-07-24 16:18:09 +00004082 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004083 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) {
4084 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo()));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004085 continue;
4086 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004087
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004088 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) {
4089 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00004090 if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4091 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004092 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo));
4093 continue;
4094 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004095
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00004096 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) {
4097 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4098 if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4099 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4100 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo));
4101 continue;
4102 }
4103
4104 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) {
4105 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
4106 if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex())
4107 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
4108 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo));
4109 continue;
4110 }
4111
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004112 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) {
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004113 // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into
4114 // the cold path. See optimizeCallInst
4115 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold))
4116 continue;
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00004117
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004118 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue());
4119 if (!IA) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004120
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004121 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out.
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004122 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004123 return true;
4124 continue;
4125 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004126
Benjamin Kramerfc638c12017-07-24 16:18:09 +00004127 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI,
4128 SeenInsts))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004129 return true;
4130 }
4131
4132 return false;
4133}
4134
Sanjay Patel9fbe22b2015-10-09 18:01:03 +00004135/// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're
4136/// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing
4137/// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the
4138/// instruction already.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004139bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004140 Value *KnownLive2) {
4141 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live!
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004142 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004143 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004144
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004145 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live.
4146 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004147
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004148 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is
4149 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is
4150 // live for the whole function.
4151 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val))
4152 if (AI->isStaticAlloca())
4153 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004154
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004155 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's
4156 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we
4157 // can reasonably fold it.
4158 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent());
4159}
4160
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004161/// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified
4162/// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it.
4163/// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses.
4164/// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it
4165/// into the load. For example, consider this code:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004166///
4167/// X = ...
4168/// Y = X+1
4169/// use(Y) -> nonload/store
4170/// Z = Y+1
4171/// load Z
4172///
4173/// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z
4174/// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to
4175/// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one
4176/// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the
4177/// number of computations either.
4178///
4179/// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If
4180/// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to
4181/// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier.
4182bool AddressingModeMatcher::
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004183isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004184 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) {
4185 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004186
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004187 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it,
4188 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get
4189 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those
4190 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this
4191 // address extends the lifetime of.
4192 //
4193 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here,
4194 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any
4195 // folded immediates).
4196 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004197
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004198 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their
4199 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004200 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004201 BaseReg = nullptr;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004202 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004203 ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004204
4205 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live
4206 // ranges, we're ok with it.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004207 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004208 return true;
4209
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004210 // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them,
4211 // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register
4212 // for another (at worst.) In this context, folding an addressing mode into
Junmo Park6098cbb2016-03-11 07:05:32 +00004213 // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004214 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses;
4215 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts;
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004216 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004217 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use!
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004218
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004219 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of
4220 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004221 // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see
4222 // if they could *actually* fold the instruction. The assumption is that
4223 // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved
4224 // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates
4225 // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code
4226 // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to
4227 // compute an effective address. (i.e LEA on x86)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004228 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts;
4229 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4230 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first;
4231 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004232
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004233 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't
4234 // know what it accesses.
4235 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004236 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType());
4237 if (!AddrTy)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004238 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004239 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType();
4240 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace();
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004241
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004242 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This
4243 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will
4244 // *actually* cover the shared instruction.
4245 ExtAddrMode Result;
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00004246 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4247 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004248 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher(MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI,
4249 AddressAccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00004250 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004251 PromotedInsts, TPT);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004252 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004253 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004254 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
4255
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00004256 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not
4257 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped
4258 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state.
4259 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4260
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004261 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it.
David Majnemer0d955d02016-08-11 22:21:41 +00004262 if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004263 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004264
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004265 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear();
4266 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00004267
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00004268 return true;
4269}
4270
4271} // end anonymous namespace
4272
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004273/// Return true if the specified values are defined in a
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004274/// different basic block than BB.
4275static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
4276 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
4277 return I->getParent() != BB;
4278 return false;
4279}
4280
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004281/// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so
4282/// can be done without increasing register pressure. The need for the
4283/// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing
4284/// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation.
4285///
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004286/// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do
4287/// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try
4288/// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the
4289/// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As
4290/// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible.
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00004291///
4292/// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004293/// operands. It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold
4294/// call sites into their (cold) basic block.
4295///
4296/// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can
4297/// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure
4298/// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the
4299/// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.).
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004300bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004301 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004302 Value *Repl = Addr;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004303
4304 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004305 // unprofitable PRE transformations.
Cameron Zwarich43cecb12011-01-03 06:33:01 +00004306 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist;
4307 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004308 worklist.push_back(Addr);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004309
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004310 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI nodes, and ensure that
4311 // the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI roots of the graph
4312 // are equivalent.
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004313 bool AddrModeFound = false;
Serguei Katkov0b7b59a2017-07-11 06:24:44 +00004314 bool PhiSeen = false;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004315 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts;
4316 ExtAddrMode AddrMode;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004317 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004318 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4319 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004320 while (!worklist.empty()) {
4321 Value *V = worklist.back();
4322 worklist.pop_back();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004323
Serguei Katkov4ea855e2017-07-19 04:49:17 +00004324 // We allow traversing cyclic Phi nodes.
4325 // In case of success after this loop we ensure that traversing through
4326 // Phi nodes ends up with all cases to compute address of the form
4327 // BaseGV + Base + Scale * Index + Offset
4328 // where Scale and Offset are constans and BaseGV, Base and Index
4329 // are exactly the same Values in all cases.
4330 // It means that BaseGV, Scale and Offset dominate our memory instruction
4331 // and have the same value as they had in address computation represented
4332 // as Phi. So we can safely sink address computation to memory instruction.
4333 if (!Visited.insert(V).second)
4334 continue;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004335
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004336 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values.
4337 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) {
Pete Cooper833f34d2015-05-12 20:05:31 +00004338 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values())
4339 worklist.push_back(IncValue);
Serguei Katkov0b7b59a2017-07-11 06:24:44 +00004340 PhiSeen = true;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004341 continue;
4342 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004343
Philip Reamesac115ed2016-03-09 23:13:12 +00004344 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed. Note that
4345 // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate
4346 // addressing instructions might have.
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004347 AddrModeInsts.clear();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004348 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match(
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004349 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, AddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI,
4350 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT);
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00004351
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004352 if (!AddrModeFound) {
4353 AddrModeFound = true;
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00004354 AddrMode = NewAddrMode;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004355 continue;
4356 }
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004357 if (NewAddrMode == AddrMode)
4358 continue;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004359
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004360 AddrModeFound = false;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004361 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004362 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004363
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00004364 // If the addressing mode couldn't be determined, or if multiple different
4365 // ones were determined, bail out now.
Serguei Katkova6fba3d2017-07-18 05:16:38 +00004366 if (!AddrModeFound) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00004367 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4368 return false;
4369 }
4370 TPT.commit();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004371
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004372 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything.
Serguei Katkov0b7b59a2017-07-11 06:24:44 +00004373 // If we saw Phi node then it is not local definitely.
4374 if (!PhiSeen && none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) {
Justin Lebar838c7f52016-11-21 22:49:11 +00004375 return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent());
Serguei Katkov0b7b59a2017-07-11 06:24:44 +00004376 })) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004377 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004378 return false;
4379 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004380
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004381 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is
4382 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are
4383 // guaranteed to happen later.
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004384 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004385
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004386 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know
4387 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already
4388 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse the
4389 // computation.
4390 Value *&SunkAddr = SunkAddrs[Addr];
4391 if (SunkAddr) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004392 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004393 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004394 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004395 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +00004396 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs ||
4397 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM &&
Igor Laevsky3be81ba2017-02-07 13:27:20 +00004398 SubtargetInfo->useAA())) {
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004399 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This
4400 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities.
4401 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004402 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00004403 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004404 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004405
4406 // First, find the pointer.
4407 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4408 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004409 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004410 }
4411
4412 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
4413 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a
4414 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless).
4415 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4416 return false;
4417
4418 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4419 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4420 }
4421
Eli Friedman6f7c9ad2017-07-12 23:30:02 +00004422 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4423 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4424 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4425 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4426 // do not match instead of extending it.
4427 //
4428 // (See below for code to add the scale.)
4429 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4430 Type *ScaledRegTy = AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType();
4431 if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() >
4432 cast<IntegerType>(ScaledRegTy)->getBitWidth())
4433 return false;
4434 }
4435
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004436 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
4437 if (ResultPtr)
4438 return false;
4439
4440 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV;
4441 }
4442
4443 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher
4444 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case,
4445 // use it here.
Keno Fischer05e4ac22017-06-29 20:28:59 +00004446 if (!DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType())) {
4447 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4448 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(),
4449 "sunkaddr");
4450 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
4451 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) {
4452 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(),
4453 "sunkaddr");
4454 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
4455 }
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004456 }
4457
4458 if (!ResultPtr &&
4459 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4460 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
4461 } else if (!ResultPtr) {
4462 return false;
4463 } else {
4464 Type *I8PtrTy =
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004465 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
4466 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004467
4468 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4469 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4470 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4471 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4472 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4473 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4474 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
4475 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
4476 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
4477
4478 ResultIndex = V;
4479 }
4480
4481 // Add the scale value.
4482 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4483 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4484 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4485 // done.
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004486 } else {
Eli Friedman6f7c9ad2017-07-12 23:30:02 +00004487 assert(cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4488 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth() &&
4489 "We can't transform if ScaledReg is too narrow");
4490 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004491 }
4492
4493 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
4494 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4495 "sunkaddr");
4496 if (ResultIndex)
4497 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr");
4498 else
4499 ResultIndex = V;
4500 }
4501
4502 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4503 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
4504 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
4505 if (ResultIndex) {
NAKAMURA Takumif51a34e2014-10-29 15:23:11 +00004506 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with
4507 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging.
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004508 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004509 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004510 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004511 }
4512
4513 ResultIndex = V;
4514 }
4515
4516 if (!ResultIndex) {
4517 SunkAddr = ResultPtr;
4518 } else {
4519 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004520 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00004521 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004522 }
4523
4524 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Eli Friedmanc12a5a72017-02-24 20:51:36 +00004525 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00004526 }
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004527 } else {
Keno Fischer05e4ac22017-06-29 20:28:59 +00004528 // We'd require a ptrtoint/inttoptr down the line, which we can't do for
4529 // non-integral pointers, so in that case bail out now.
4530 Type *BaseTy = AddrMode.BaseReg ? AddrMode.BaseReg->getType() : nullptr;
4531 Type *ScaleTy = AddrMode.Scale ? AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType() : nullptr;
4532 PointerType *BasePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(BaseTy);
4533 PointerType *ScalePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(ScaleTy);
4534 if (DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType()) ||
4535 (BasePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(BasePtrTy)) ||
4536 (ScalePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(ScalePtrTy)) ||
4537 (AddrMode.BaseGV &&
4538 DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(AddrMode.BaseGV->getType())))
4539 return false;
4540
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00004541 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00004542 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00004543 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004544 Value *Result = nullptr;
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004545
4546 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
4547 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
4548 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
4549 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
4550 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
4551 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
4552 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00004553 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004554 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004555 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004556 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00004557 Result = V;
4558 }
4559
4560 // Add the scale value.
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004561 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
4562 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
4563 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
4564 // done.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00004565 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004566 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004567 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
4568 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004569 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004570 } else {
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00004571 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
4572 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
4573 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
4574 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
4575 // do not match instead of extending it.
Joey Gouly12a8bf02014-05-13 15:42:45 +00004576 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result);
Jim Grosbach83b44e12014-04-10 00:27:45 +00004577 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg))
4578 I->eraseFromParent();
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00004579 return false;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004580 }
4581 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004582 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
4583 "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004584 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004585 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004586 else
4587 Result = V;
4588 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004589
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004590 // Add in the BaseGV if present.
4591 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004592 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004593 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004594 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004595 else
4596 Result = V;
4597 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004598
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004599 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
4600 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
Owen Andersonedb4a702009-07-24 23:12:02 +00004601 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004602 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004603 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004604 else
4605 Result = V;
4606 }
4607
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004608 if (!Result)
Owen Anderson5a1acd92009-07-31 20:28:14 +00004609 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004610 else
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00004611 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004612 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004613
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004614 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004615
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004616 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions
4617 // using it.
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00004618 if (Repl->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004619 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator.
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00004620 // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00004621 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator;
Sanjoy Dase6bca0e2017-05-01 17:07:49 +00004622 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004623 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004624
Benjamin Kramer8bcc9712012-08-29 15:32:21 +00004625 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004626
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith7b269642016-02-21 19:37:45 +00004627 if (IterHandle != CurValue) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00004628 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
4629 // start of the block.
4630 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
4631 SunkAddrs.clear();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004632 }
Dale Johannesenb67a6e662010-03-31 20:37:15 +00004633 }
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00004634 ++NumMemoryInsts;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00004635 return true;
4636}
4637
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004638/// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their
4639/// address computing into the block when possible / profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004640bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) {
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004641 bool MadeChange = false;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004642
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00004643 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI =
Sanjay Patel4137d512017-06-07 14:29:52 +00004644 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getFunction())->getRegisterInfo();
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00004645 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
4646 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00004647 unsigned ArgNo = 0;
John Thompson1094c802010-09-13 18:15:37 +00004648 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4649 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004650
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004651 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Dale Johannesence97d552010-06-25 21:55:36 +00004652 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004653
Eli Friedman666bbe32008-02-26 18:37:49 +00004654 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory &&
4655 OpInfo.isIndirect) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00004656 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004657 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00004658 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput)
4659 ArgNo++;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00004660 }
4661
4662 return MadeChange;
4663}
4664
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004665/// \brief Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004666/// sign extensions.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004667static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
4668 assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use");
4669 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin());
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004670 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser);
4671 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType();
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004672 for (const User *U : Val->users()) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004673 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
4674 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI)))
4675 return false;
4676 Type *CurTy = UI->getType();
4677 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE.
4678 if (CurTy == ExtTy)
4679 continue;
4680
4681 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation:
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004682 // a = Val
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004683 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4684 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3
4685 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into:
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004686 // a = Val
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004687 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
4688 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3
4689 // However, the last sext is not free.
4690 if (IsSExt)
4691 return false;
4692
4693 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another.
4694 // In that case, we would not account for a different use.
4695 Type *NarrowTy;
4696 Type *LargeTy;
4697 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
4698 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) {
4699 NarrowTy = CurTy;
4700 LargeTy = ExtTy;
4701 } else {
4702 NarrowTy = ExtTy;
4703 LargeTy = CurTy;
4704 }
4705
4706 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy))
4707 return false;
4708 }
4709 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free.
4710 return true;
4711}
4712
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004713/// \brief Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue
4714/// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is
4715/// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts.
4716/// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert
4717/// them.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004718///
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004719/// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004720bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts(
4721 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
4722 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts,
4723 unsigned CreatedInstsCost) {
4724 bool Promoted = false;
4725
4726 // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004727 for (auto I : Exts) {
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004728 // Early check if we directly have ext(load).
4729 if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) {
4730 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4731 continue;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004732 }
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004733
4734 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion. The reason we have
4735 // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension
4736 // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved
4737 // up without any promotion on its operands.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004738 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion)
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004739 return false;
4740
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004741 // Get the action to perform the promotion.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004742 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
4743 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004744 // Check if we can promote.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004745 if (!TPH) {
4746 // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand.
4747 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004748 continue;
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004749 }
4750
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004751 // Save the current state.
4752 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
4753 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
4754 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004755 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0;
4756 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004757 // Promote.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004758 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost,
4759 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004760 assert(PromotedVal &&
4761 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
4762
4763 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load.
4764 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically
4765 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality.
4766 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge
4767 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going,
4768 // because the new extension may be removed too.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004769 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost;
Jun Bum Limb99a06b2017-01-27 17:16:37 +00004770 // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004771 // conservatively ceiling it to 0.
Jun Bum Limb99a06b2017-01-27 17:16:37 +00004772 TotalCreatedInstsCost =
4773 std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost));
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004774 if (!StressExtLdPromotion &&
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00004775 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 ||
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004776 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) {
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004777 // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and
4778 // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest
4779 // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004780 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004781 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
4782 continue;
4783 }
4784 // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable.
4785 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts;
4786 (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost);
4787 bool NewPromoted = false;
4788 for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) {
4789 Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst);
4790 Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0);
4791 // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check
4792 // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load).
4793 if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) &&
4794 !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost ||
4795 (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI))))
4796 continue;
4797
4798 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt);
4799 NewPromoted = true;
4800 }
4801
4802 // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback
4803 // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension.
4804 if (!NewPromoted) {
4805 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4806 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004807 continue;
4808 }
4809 // The promotion is profitable.
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004810 Promoted = true;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004811 }
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004812 return Promoted;
4813}
4814
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004815/// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other.
4816bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F) {
4817 DominatorTree DT(F);
4818 bool Changed = false;
4819 for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) {
4820 SExts &Insts = Entry.second;
4821 SExts CurPts;
4822 for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) {
4823 if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) ||
4824 Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first)
4825 continue;
4826 bool inserted = false;
4827 for (auto &Pt : CurPts) {
4828 if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) {
4829 Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst);
4830 RemovedInsts.insert(Pt);
4831 Pt->removeFromParent();
4832 Pt = Inst;
4833 inserted = true;
4834 Changed = true;
4835 break;
4836 }
4837 if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst))
4838 // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the
4839 // expermients show it is not profitable.
4840 continue;
4841 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt);
4842 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst);
4843 Inst->removeFromParent();
4844 inserted = true;
4845 Changed = true;
4846 break;
4847 }
4848 if (!inserted)
4849 CurPts.push_back(Inst);
4850 }
4851 }
4852 return Changed;
4853}
4854
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004855/// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in
4856/// \p MovedExts.
4857bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd(
4858 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI,
4859 Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) {
4860 for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) {
4861 if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) {
4862 LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0));
4863 Inst = MovedExtInst;
4864 break;
4865 }
4866 }
4867 if (!LI)
4868 return false;
4869
4870 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do.
4871 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote.
4872 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable.
4873 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent())
4874 return false;
4875
Haicheng Wuabdef9e2017-07-15 02:12:16 +00004876 return TLI->isExtLoad(LI, Inst, *DL);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004877}
4878
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00004879/// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load,
4880/// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the
4881/// extend into the load.
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004882///
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004883/// E.g.,
4884/// \code
4885/// %ld = load i32* %addr
4886/// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4
4887/// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64
4888// \endcode
4889/// =>
4890/// \code
4891/// %ld = load i32* %addr
4892/// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64
4893/// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4
4894/// \encode
4895/// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which
4896/// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64.
4897///
4898/// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended
4899/// value used into memory accesses.
4900/// E.g.,
4901/// \code
4902/// a = add nsw i32 b, 3
4903/// d = sext i32 a to i64
4904/// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d
4905/// \endcode
4906/// =>
4907/// \code
4908/// f = sext i32 b to i64
4909/// a = add nsw i64 f, 3
4910/// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a
4911/// \endcode
4912///
4913/// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some
4914/// promotions apply.
4915bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) {
4916 // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to
4917 // be effective.
Chandler Carruth0f139b42016-11-04 06:54:00 +00004918 if (!TLI)
4919 return false;
4920
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004921 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false;
4922 /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type
4923 /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right
4924 /// type and used in memory accesses.
4925 bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion(
4926 *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader);
4927 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004928 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004929 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004930 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004931 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts;
4932 Exts.push_back(Inst);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004933
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004934 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts);
Jun Bum Lim42301012017-03-17 19:05:21 +00004935
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00004936 // Look for a load being extended.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00004937 LoadInst *LI = nullptr;
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00004938 Instruction *ExtFedByLoad;
4939
4940 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended
4941 // load.
4942 if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) {
4943 assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension");
4944 TPT.commit();
4945 // Move the extend into the same block as the load
4946 ExtFedByLoad->removeFromParent();
4947 ExtFedByLoad->insertAfter(LI);
4948 // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved
4949 // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location
4950 // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact
4951 // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a
4952 // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as
4953 // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug
4954 // location for the load and the zext.
4955 ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc());
4956 ++NumExtsMoved;
4957 Inst = ExtFedByLoad;
4958 return true;
4959 }
4960
4961 // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets.
4962 if (ATPConsiderable &&
4963 performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
4964 HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts))
4965 return true;
4966
4967 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
4968 return false;
4969}
4970
4971// Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable.
4972// If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext
4973// instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if
4974// AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the
4975// extension is just profitable.
4976bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion(
4977 Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader,
4978 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
4979 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4980 bool Promoted = false;
4981 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts;
4982 bool AllSeenFirst = true;
4983 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
4984 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
4985 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen =
4986 SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain);
4987 // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote
4988 // it as well.
4989 if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) {
4990 if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr)
4991 UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second);
4992 AllSeenFirst = false;
4993 }
4994 }
4995
4996 if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader &&
4997 SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) {
4998 TPT.commit();
4999 if (HasPromoted)
5000 Promoted = true;
5001 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5002 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5003 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
5004 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
5005 }
5006 // Update Inst as promotion happen.
5007 Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val();
5008 } else {
5009 // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain
5010 // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt
5011 // chain derived from the same header.
5012 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) {
5013 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5014 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst;
5015 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00005016 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00005017 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00005018
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00005019 if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty())
5020 for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) {
5021 if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt))
5022 continue;
5023 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts);
5024 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
5025 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains;
5026 Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt);
5027 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains);
5028 TPT.commit();
5029 if (HasPromoted)
5030 Promoted = true;
5031 for (auto I : Chains) {
5032 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0);
5033 // Mark this as handled.
5034 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr;
5035 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I);
5036 }
5037 }
5038 return Promoted;
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00005039}
5040
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005041bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) {
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005042 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent();
5043
Bob Wilsonff714f92010-09-21 21:44:14 +00005044 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005045 // other uses of the source with result of extension.
5046 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0);
5047 if (Src->hasOneUse())
5048 return false;
5049
Evan Cheng2011df42007-12-13 07:50:36 +00005050 // Only do this xform if truncating is free.
Gabor Greifaa261722008-02-26 19:13:21 +00005051 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType()))
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00005052 return false;
5053
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00005054 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00005055 // this block.
5056 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent())
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00005057 return false;
5058
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005059 bool DefIsLiveOut = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005060 for (User *U : I->users()) {
5061 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005062
5063 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005064 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005065 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5066 DefIsLiveOut = true;
5067 break;
5068 }
5069 if (!DefIsLiveOut)
5070 return false;
5071
Jim Grosbach0f38c1e2013-04-15 17:40:48 +00005072 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005073 for (User *U : Src->users()) {
5074 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
5075 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00005076 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5077 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing
5078 // reloads just before load / store instructions.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005079 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI))
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00005080 return false;
5081 }
5082
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005083 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once.
5084 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs;
5085
5086 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005087 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) {
5088 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005089
5090 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
5091 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
5092 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5093
5094 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use.
5095 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB];
5096
5097 if (!InsertedTrunc) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00005098 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00005099 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5100 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00005101 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005102 }
5103
5104 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005105 U = InsertedTrunc;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00005106 ++NumExtUses;
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00005107 MadeChange = true;
5108 }
5109
5110 return MadeChange;
5111}
5112
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005113// Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits. Add an "and"
5114// just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction,
5115// with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using
5116// the loaded value. "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion
5117// of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose
5118// path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially
5119// remove.
5120//
5121// For example:
5122//
5123// b0:
5124// x = load i32
5125// ...
5126// b1:
5127// y = and x, 0xff
5128// z = use y
5129//
5130// becomes:
5131//
5132// b0:
5133// x = load i32
5134// x' = and x, 0xff
5135// ...
5136// b1:
5137// z = use x'
5138//
5139// whereas:
5140//
5141// b0:
5142// x1 = load i32
5143// ...
5144// b1:
5145// x2 = load i32
5146// ...
5147// b2:
5148// x = phi x1, x2
5149// y = and x, 0xff
5150//
5151// becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load):
5152//
5153// b0:
5154// x1 = load i32
5155// x1' = and x1, 0xff
5156// ...
5157// b1:
5158// x2 = load i32
5159// x2' = and x2, 0xff
5160// ...
5161// b2:
5162// x = phi x1', x2'
5163// y = and x, 0xff
5164//
5165
5166bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) {
5167
5168 if (!Load->isSimple() ||
5169 !(Load->getType()->isIntegerTy() || Load->getType()->isPointerTy()))
5170 return false;
5171
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00005172 // Skip loads we've already transformed.
5173 if (Load->hasOneUse() &&
5174 InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin())))
5175 return false;
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005176
5177 // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits
5178 // of the loaded value are needed.
5179 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList;
5180 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited;
5181 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove;
5182 for (auto *U : Load->users())
5183 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5184
5185 EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType());
5186 unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits();
5187 APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0);
5188 APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0);
5189
5190 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
5191 Instruction *I = WorkList.back();
5192 WorkList.pop_back();
5193
5194 // Break use-def graph loops.
5195 if (!Visited.insert(I).second)
5196 continue;
5197
5198 // For a PHI node, push all of its users.
5199 if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
5200 for (auto *U : Phi->users())
5201 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U));
5202 continue;
5203 }
5204
5205 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
5206 case llvm::Instruction::And: {
5207 auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5208 if (!AndC)
5209 return false;
5210 APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue();
5211 DemandBits |= AndBits;
5212 // Keep track of the widest and mask we see.
5213 if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits))
5214 WidestAndBits = AndBits;
5215 if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load)
5216 AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I);
5217 break;
5218 }
5219
5220 case llvm::Instruction::Shl: {
5221 auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
5222 if (!ShlC)
5223 return false;
5224 uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1);
Craig Topperfc947bc2017-04-18 17:14:21 +00005225 DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005226 break;
5227 }
5228
5229 case llvm::Instruction::Trunc: {
5230 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType());
5231 unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits();
Craig Topperfc947bc2017-04-18 17:14:21 +00005232 DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005233 break;
5234 }
5235
5236 default:
5237 return false;
5238 }
5239 }
5240
5241 uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits();
5242 // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the
5243 // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid. For example,
5244 // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but
5245 // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR
5246 // followed by an AND.
5247 // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either
5248 // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to
5249 // a single instruction.
5250 //
5251 // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits
5252 // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel.
Craig Topperd33ee1b2017-04-03 16:34:59 +00005253 if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) ||
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005254 WidestAndBits != DemandBits)
5255 return false;
5256
5257 LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext();
5258 Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits);
5259 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy);
5260
5261 // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads.
5262 if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() ||
5263 !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT))
5264 return false;
5265
5266 IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode());
5267 auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(
5268 Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits)));
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00005269 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
5270 // optimizations don't touch it.
5271 InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd);
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00005272
5273 // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the
5274 // new and itself).
5275 Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5276 NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load);
5277
5278 // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant.
5279 for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove)
5280 // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the
5281 // new and.
5282 if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) {
5283 And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd);
5284 if (&*CurInstIterator == And)
5285 CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator());
5286 And->eraseFromParent();
5287 ++NumAndUses;
5288 }
5289
5290 ++NumAndsAdded;
5291 return true;
5292}
5293
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005294/// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction
5295/// that is only used once.
5296static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) {
5297 auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
5298 // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side
5299 // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute.
Rafael Espindola84921b92015-10-24 23:11:13 +00005300 return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
5301 TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005302}
5303
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00005304/// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch.
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005305static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI,
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005306 const TargetLowering *TLI,
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005307 SelectInst *SI) {
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005308 // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper.
5309 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive())
5310 return false;
5311
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005312 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005313 // whether a select is better represented as a branch.
5314
5315 // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable,
5316 // then we want to replace the select with a branch.
5317 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
5318 if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
5319 uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
5320 uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
Sanjay Patelc7b91e62016-05-09 17:31:55 +00005321 if (Sum != 0) {
5322 auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum);
5323 if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold())
5324 return true;
5325 }
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005326 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005327
5328 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition());
5329
Sanjay Patel4e652762015-09-28 22:14:51 +00005330 // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its
5331 // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's
5332 // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch.
Sanjay Patel5e5f0e92015-09-28 21:44:46 +00005333 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse())
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005334 return false;
5335
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005336 // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side
5337 // of the select, we should form a branch.
5338 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) ||
5339 sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue()))
5340 return true;
5341
5342 return false;
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005343}
5344
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005345/// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return
5346/// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any
5347/// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select
5348/// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects.
5349static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue(
5350 SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue,
5351 const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) {
5352 Value *V;
5353
5354 for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI);
5355 DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) {
Dehao Chenc32d7122016-09-12 20:29:54 +00005356 assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() &&
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005357 "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI");
5358 V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue());
5359 }
5360 return V;
5361}
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005362
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005363/// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction,
5364/// turn it into a branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005365bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) {
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005366 // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition.
5367 SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI;
5368 ASI.push_back(SI);
5369 for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI);
5370 It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) {
5371 SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It);
5372 if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) {
5373 ASI.push_back(I);
5374 } else {
5375 break;
5376 }
5377 }
5378
5379 SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back();
5380 // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions
5381 // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch.
5382 CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator());
5383
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005384 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1);
5385
5386 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ?
Sanjay Patela31b0c02016-04-26 00:47:39 +00005387 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI || VectorCond ||
5388 SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005389 return false;
5390
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00005391 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind;
5392 if (VectorCond)
5393 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect;
5394 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy())
5395 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal;
5396 else
5397 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect;
5398
Sanjay Pateld66607b2016-04-26 17:11:17 +00005399 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) &&
5400 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI))
5401 return false;
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005402
5403 ModifiedDT = true;
5404
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005405 // Transform a sequence like this:
5406 // start:
5407 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5408 // %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d
5409 //
5410 // Into:
5411 // start:
5412 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b
5413 // br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false
5414 // select.true:
5415 // br label %select.end
5416 // select.false:
5417 // br label %select.end
5418 // select.end:
5419 // %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ]
5420 //
5421 // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from
5422 // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch.
5423 // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that
5424 // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the
5425 // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI
5426 // predecessor block will be the start block.
5427
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005428 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks.
5429 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent();
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005430 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI));
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005431 BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005432
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005433 // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005434 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005435
5436 // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch.
5437 // At least one will become an actual new basic block.
5438 BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr;
5439 BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr;
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005440 BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr;
5441 BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005442
5443 // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing
5444 // them speculatively.
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005445 for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) {
5446 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) {
5447 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
5448 TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink",
5449 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5450 TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock);
5451 }
5452 auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue());
5453 TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch);
5454 }
5455 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) {
5456 if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
5457 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink",
5458 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5459 FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5460 }
5461 auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue());
5462 FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch);
5463 }
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005464 }
5465
5466 // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side
5467 // for a new input value to the PHI.
5468 if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) {
5469 assert(TrueBlock == nullptr &&
5470 "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select");
5471
5472 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false",
5473 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock);
5474 BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock);
5475 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005476
5477 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition.
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005478 // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths
5479 // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block
5480 // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of
5481 // view of the new PHI.
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005482 BasicBlock *TT, *FT;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005483 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005484 TT = EndBlock;
5485 FT = FalseBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005486 TrueBlock = StartBlock;
5487 } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005488 TT = TrueBlock;
5489 FT = EndBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005490 FalseBlock = StartBlock;
5491 } else {
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005492 TT = TrueBlock;
5493 FT = FalseBlock;
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005494 }
Xinliang David Li241e6c72016-09-03 21:26:36 +00005495 IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005496
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005497 SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS;
5498 INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end());
5499 // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the
5500 // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select
5501 // to get the PHI operand.
5502 for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) {
5503 SelectInst *SI = *It;
5504 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node.
5505 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front());
5506 PN->takeName(SI);
5507 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock);
5508 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock);
Sanjay Patel69a50a12015-10-19 21:59:12 +00005509
Dehao Chen9bbb9412016-09-12 20:23:28 +00005510 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
5511 SI->eraseFromParent();
5512 INS.erase(SI);
5513 ++NumSelectsExpanded;
5514 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005515
5516 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block.
5517 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end();
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00005518 return true;
5519}
5520
Benjamin Kramer573ff362014-03-01 17:24:40 +00005521static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005522 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask());
5523 int SplatElem = -1;
5524 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) {
5525 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem)
5526 return false;
5527 SplatElem = Mask[i];
5528 }
5529
5530 return true;
5531}
5532
5533/// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same
5534/// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases
5535/// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that
5536/// codegen can spot all lanes are identical.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005537bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005538 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent();
5539
5540 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive.
5541 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType()))
5542 return false;
5543
5544 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a
5545 // constant splat.
5546 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI))
5547 return false;
5548
5549 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once.
5550 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles;
5551
5552 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005553 for (User *U : SVI->users()) {
5554 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005555
5556 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005557 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005558 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
5559
5560 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005561 if (!UI->isShift()) continue;
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005562
5563 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't
5564 // already have a copy.
5565 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB];
5566
5567 if (!InsertedShuffle) {
5568 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00005569 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end());
5570 InsertedShuffle =
5571 new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1),
5572 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005573 }
5574
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005575 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00005576 MadeChange = true;
5577 }
5578
5579 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle.
5580 if (SVI->use_empty()) {
5581 SVI->eraseFromParent();
5582 MadeChange = true;
5583 }
5584
5585 return MadeChange;
5586}
5587
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00005588bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) {
5589 if (!TLI || !DL)
5590 return false;
5591
5592 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5593 Type *OldType = Cond->getType();
5594 LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext();
5595 MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType));
5596 unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits();
5597
5598 if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth())
5599 return false;
5600
5601 // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition
5602 // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the
5603 // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent
5604 // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the
5605 // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends,
5606 // where N is the number of cases in the switch.
5607 auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth);
5608
5609 // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch
5610 // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended.
5611 // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending
5612 // everything instead.
5613 Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt;
5614 if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond))
5615 if (Arg->hasSExtAttr())
5616 ExtType = Instruction::SExt;
5617
5618 auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType);
5619 ExtInst->insertBefore(SI);
5620 SI->setCondition(ExtInst);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005621 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00005622 APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
5623 APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ?
5624 NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth);
5625 Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst));
5626 }
5627
5628 return true;
5629}
5630
Zaara Syeda3a7578c2017-05-31 17:12:38 +00005631
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005632namespace {
5633/// \brief Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one.
5634/// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition.
5635/// E.g.,
5636/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5637/// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0
5638/// c = scalar_op b
5639/// store c
5640///
5641/// =>
5642/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
5643/// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane)
5644/// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0
5645/// * store d
5646/// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the
5647/// transition.
5648class VectorPromoteHelper {
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005649 /// DataLayout associated with the current module.
5650 const DataLayout &DL;
5651
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005652 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations.
5653 const TargetLowering &TLI;
5654
5655 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain.
5656 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
5657
5658 /// The transition being moved downwards.
5659 Instruction *Transition;
5660 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted.
5661 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted;
5662 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract.
5663 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost;
5664 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition.
5665 Instruction *CombineInst;
5666
5667 /// \brief The instruction that represents the current end of the transition.
5668 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain
5669 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition.
5670 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const {
5671 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty())
5672 return Transition;
5673 return InstsToBePromoted.back();
5674 }
5675
5676 /// \brief Return the index of the original value in the transition.
5677 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value,
5678 /// c, is at index 0.
5679 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const {
5680 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5681 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5682 return 0;
5683 }
5684
5685 /// \brief Return the index of the index in the transition.
5686 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index
5687 /// is at index 1.
5688 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const {
5689 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
5690 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
5691 return 1;
5692 }
5693
5694 /// \brief Get the type of the transition.
5695 /// This is the type of the original value.
5696 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the
5697 /// transition is <2 x i32>.
5698 Type *getTransitionType() const {
5699 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType();
5700 }
5701
5702 /// \brief Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through.
5703 /// I.e., we have the following sequence:
5704 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2>
5705 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ...
5706 /// =>
5707 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ...
5708 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2>
5709 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted);
5710
5711 /// \brief Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the
5712 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted.
5713 bool isProfitableToPromote() {
5714 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
5715 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)
5716 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue()
5717 : -1;
5718 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType();
5719
5720 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst);
5721 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace();
5722 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment();
5723 // Check if this store is supported.
5724 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005725 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS,
5726 Align)) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005727 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine
5728 // the extract with the store.
5729 return false;
5730 }
5731
5732 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition
5733 // scalar to vector.
5734 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost.
5735 uint64_t ScalarCost =
5736 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index);
5737 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost;
5738 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) {
5739 // Compute the cost.
5740 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones.
5741 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat
5742 // constant.
5743 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0);
5744 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) ||
5745 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0);
5746 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK =
5747 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5748 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5749 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK =
5750 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
5751 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
5752 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(
5753 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5754 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType,
5755 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
5756 }
5757 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: "
5758 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n');
5759 return ScalarCost > VectorCost;
5760 }
5761
5762 /// \brief Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same
5763 /// number of elements as the transition.
5764 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated
Benjamin Kramerdf005cb2015-08-08 18:27:36 +00005765 /// across the whole vector.
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005766 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>,
5767 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible:
5768 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only
5769 /// used at the index of the extract.
5770 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const {
5771 unsigned ExtractIdx = UINT_MAX;
5772 if (!UseSplat) {
5773 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to
5774 // use a splat constant.
5775 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx());
5776 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx))
5777 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue();
5778 else
5779 UseSplat = true;
5780 }
5781
5782 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements();
5783 if (UseSplat)
5784 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val);
5785
5786 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec;
5787 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType());
5788 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) {
5789 if (Idx == ExtractIdx)
5790 ConstVec.push_back(Val);
5791 else
5792 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal);
5793 }
5794 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec);
5795 }
5796
5797 /// \brief Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx
5798 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior.
5799 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use,
5800 unsigned OperandIdx) {
5801 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on
5802 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction.
5803 if (OperandIdx != 1)
5804 return false;
5805 switch (Use->getOpcode()) {
5806 default:
5807 return false;
5808 case Instruction::SDiv:
5809 case Instruction::UDiv:
5810 case Instruction::SRem:
5811 case Instruction::URem:
5812 return true;
5813 case Instruction::FDiv:
5814 case Instruction::FRem:
5815 return !Use->hasNoNaNs();
5816 }
5817 llvm_unreachable(nullptr);
5818 }
5819
5820public:
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005821 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI,
5822 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition,
5823 unsigned CombineCost)
5824 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition),
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005825 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost), CombineInst(nullptr) {
5826 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null");
5827 }
5828
5829 /// \brief Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type.
5830 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
5831 // We could support CastInst too.
5832 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted);
5833 }
5834
5835 /// \brief Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted
5836 /// by moving downward the transition through.
5837 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
5838 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded.
5839 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions.
5840 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
5841 const Value *Val = U.get();
5842 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) {
5843 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs,
5844 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a
5845 // division by zero.
5846 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()))
5847 return false;
5848 continue;
5849 }
5850 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) &&
5851 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val))
5852 return false;
5853 }
5854 // Check that the resulting operation is legal.
5855 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode());
5856 if (!ISDOpcode)
5857 return false;
5858 return StressStoreExtract ||
Ahmed Bougacha026600d2014-11-12 23:05:03 +00005859 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005860 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true));
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005861 }
5862
5863 /// \brief Check whether or not \p Use can be combined
5864 /// with the transition.
5865 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse?
5866 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); }
5867
5868 /// \brief Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted.
5869 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
5870 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted);
5871 }
5872
5873 /// \brief Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition.
5874 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) {
5875 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine");
5876 CombineInst = ToBeCombined;
5877 }
5878
5879 /// \brief Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is
5880 /// is profitable.
5881 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise.
5882 bool promote() {
5883 // Check if there is something to promote.
5884 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with,
5885 // we assume the promotion is not profitable.
5886 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst)
5887 return false;
5888
5889 // Check cost.
5890 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote())
5891 return false;
5892
5893 // Promote.
5894 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted)
5895 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted);
5896 InstsToBePromoted.clear();
5897 return true;
5898 }
5899};
5900} // End of anonymous namespace.
5901
5902void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
5903 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def
5904 // can be statically promoted.
5905 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted:
5906 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a
5907 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2
5908 // Move the transition down.
5909 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition.
5910 // = ... b => = ... Def.
5911 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() &&
5912 "The type of the result of the transition does not match "
5913 "the final type");
5914 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition);
5915 // 2. Update the type of the uses.
5916 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def.
5917 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType();
5918 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy);
5919 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted
5920 // operands.
5921 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a.
5922 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
5923 Value *Val = U.get();
5924 Value *NewVal = nullptr;
5925 if (Val == Transition)
5926 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
5927 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) ||
5928 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) {
5929 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef.
5930 NewVal = getConstantVector(
5931 cast<Constant>(Val),
5932 isa<UndefValue>(Val) ||
5933 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()));
5934 } else
Craig Topperd3c02f12015-01-05 10:15:49 +00005935 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update "
5936 "this?");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005937 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal);
5938 }
5939 Transition->removeFromParent();
5940 Transition->insertAfter(ToBePromoted);
5941 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted);
5942}
5943
5944/// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction.
5945/// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target
5946/// has this feature and this is profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00005947bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005948 unsigned CombineCost = UINT_MAX;
5949 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI ||
5950 (!StressStoreExtract &&
5951 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(),
5952 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost)))
5953 return false;
5954
5955 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition.
5956 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until:
5957 // - We can combine the transition with its single use
5958 // => we got rid of the transition.
5959 // - We escape the current basic block
5960 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and
5961 // we do not do that for now.
5962 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent();
5963 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n');
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00005964 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00005965 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be
5966 // beneficial.
5967 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) {
5968 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
5969 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
5970
5971 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) {
5972 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block ("
5973 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName()
5974 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() << ").\n");
5975 return false;
5976 }
5977
5978 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) {
5979 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n'
5980 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
5981 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted);
5982 bool Changed = VPH.promote();
5983 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed;
5984 return Changed;
5985 }
5986
5987 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n");
5988 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted))
5989 return false;
5990
5991 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n");
5992
5993 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted);
5994 Inst = ToBePromoted;
5995 }
5996 return false;
5997}
5998
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +00005999/// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values
6000/// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory.
6001/// Sometimes it is more efficent to generate separate stores for F and I,
6002/// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places.
6003///
6004/// (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64),
6005/// (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr) -->
6006/// (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4)
6007///
6008/// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like:
6009/// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
6010/// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores.
6011/// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores.
6012/// For pair of {i16, i8}, i32 store --> two i16 stores.
6013/// For pair of {i8, i8}, i16 store --> two i8 stores.
6014///
6015/// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is
6016/// supported.
6017///
6018/// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below
6019/// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo.
6020/// void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &);
6021/// hoo() {
6022/// ...
6023/// goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp));
6024/// ...
6025/// }
6026///
6027/// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate
6028/// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across
6029/// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated
6030/// during code expansion.
6031static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL,
6032 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
6033 // Handle simple but common cases only.
6034 Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType();
6035 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) ||
6036 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0)
6037 return false;
6038
6039 unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2;
6040 Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize);
6041 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) !=
6042 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType))
6043 return false;
6044
6045 // Match the following patterns:
6046 // (store (or (zext LValue to i64),
6047 // (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
6048 // or
6049 // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize)
6050 // (zext LValue to i64),
6051 // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only
6052 // one use.
6053 Value *LValue, *HValue;
6054 if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(),
6055 m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))),
6056 m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))),
6057 m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize))))))
6058 return false;
6059
6060 // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32.
6061 if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6062 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize ||
6063 !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6064 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize)
6065 return false;
6066
6067 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast
6068 // as the input of target query.
6069 auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue);
6070 auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue);
6071 EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
6072 : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType());
6073 EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType())
6074 : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType());
6075 if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy))
6076 return false;
6077
6078 // Start to split store.
6079 IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext());
6080 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI);
6081
6082 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current
6083 // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner.
6084 if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
6085 LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType());
6086 if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent())
6087 HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType());
6088
6089 auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) {
6090 V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType);
6091 Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast(
6092 SI.getOperand(1),
6093 SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace()));
6094 if (Upper)
6095 Addr = Builder.CreateGEP(
6096 SplitStoreType, Addr,
6097 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1));
6098 Builder.CreateAlignedStore(
6099 V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment());
6100 };
6101
6102 CreateSplitStore(LValue, false);
6103 CreateSplitStore(HValue, true);
6104
6105 // Delete the old store.
6106 SI.eraseFromParent();
6107 return true;
6108}
6109
Sanjay Patel3b8974b2017-06-08 20:00:09 +00006110bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT) {
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00006111 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from
6112 // stepping on each other's toes.
6113 if (InsertedInsts.count(I))
6114 return false;
6115
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006116 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
6117 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG)
6118 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a
6119 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00006120 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006121 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
6122 P->eraseFromParent();
6123 ++NumPHIsElim;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006124 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006125 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006126 return false;
6127 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006128
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006129 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006130 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have
6131 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold
6132 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant
6133 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist
6134 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't
6135 // want to forward-subst the cast.
6136 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0)))
6137 return false;
6138
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006139 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL))
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006140 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006141
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006142 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006143 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't
6144 /// fit in one register
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006145 if (TLI &&
6146 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(),
6147 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) ==
6148 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006149 return SinkCast(CI);
6150 } else {
Jun Bum Limdee55652017-04-03 19:20:07 +00006151 bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006152 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I);
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00006153 }
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006154 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006155 return false;
6156 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006157
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006158 if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
Hal Finkeldecb0242014-01-02 21:13:43 +00006159 if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters())
Peter Zotovf87e5502016-04-03 17:11:53 +00006160 return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI, TLI);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006161
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006162 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) {
Sanjoy Das00757272016-12-16 20:29:39 +00006163 LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006164 if (TLI) {
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00006165 bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006166 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Geoff Berry5256fca2015-11-20 22:34:39 +00006167 Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS);
6168 return Modified;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006169 }
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00006170 return false;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006171 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006172
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006173 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) {
Wei Mia2f0b592016-12-22 19:44:45 +00006174 if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI))
6175 return true;
Sanjoy Das00757272016-12-16 20:29:39 +00006176 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006177 if (TLI) {
6178 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006179 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1),
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00006180 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS);
6181 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006182 return false;
6183 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006184
Matt Arsenault02d915b2017-03-15 22:35:20 +00006185 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) {
6186 unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace();
6187 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(),
6188 RMW->getType(), AS);
6189 }
6190
6191 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) {
6192 unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace();
6193 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(),
6194 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS);
6195 }
6196
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006197 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I);
6198
Geoff Berry5d534b62017-02-21 18:53:14 +00006199 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) &&
6200 EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI)
6201 return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts);
6202
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006203 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr ||
6204 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) {
6205 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1));
6206 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn())
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00006207 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00006208
6209 return false;
6210 }
6211
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006212 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00006213 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) {
6214 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast
6215 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(),
6216 GEPI->getName(), GEPI);
6217 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC);
6218 GEPI->eraseFromParent();
6219 ++NumGEPsElim;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006220 optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT);
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006221 return true;
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00006222 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006223 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006224 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006225
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006226 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006227 return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT);
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006228
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00006229 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006230 return optimizeSelectInst(SI);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00006231
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00006232 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006233 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00006234
Sanjay Patel0ed9aea2015-11-02 23:22:49 +00006235 if (auto *Switch = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(I))
6236 return optimizeSwitchInst(Switch);
6237
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00006238 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006239 return optimizeExtractElementInst(I);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00006240
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00006241 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00006242}
6243
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006244/// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse
6245/// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true.
6246static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL,
6247 const TargetLowering &TLI) {
6248 if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
6249 !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE,
6250 TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true)))
6251 return false;
6252
6253 SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts;
Chad Rosiera00df492016-05-25 16:22:14 +00006254 if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts))
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006255 return false;
6256 Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back();
6257 I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst);
6258 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I);
6259 return true;
6260}
6261
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00006262// In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used
6263// across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time
6264// selection.
Sanjay Patel3b8974b2017-06-08 20:00:09 +00006265bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT) {
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +00006266 SunkAddrs.clear();
Cameron Zwarich5dd2aa22011-03-02 03:31:46 +00006267 bool MadeChange = false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00006268
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00006269 CurInstIterator = BB.begin();
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00006270 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00006271 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00006272 if (ModifiedDT)
6273 return true;
6274 }
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00006275
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006276 bool MadeBitReverse = true;
6277 while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) {
6278 MadeBitReverse = false;
6279 for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) {
6280 if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) {
6281 MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true;
George Burgess IVd4febd12016-03-22 21:25:08 +00006282 ModifiedDT = true;
James Molloyf01488e2016-01-15 09:20:19 +00006283 break;
6284 }
6285 }
6286 }
James Molloy3ef84c42016-01-15 10:36:01 +00006287 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB);
Junmo Park7d6c5f12016-01-28 09:42:39 +00006288
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00006289 return MadeChange;
6290}
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006291
6292// llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00006293// handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006294// find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00006295bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006296 bool MadeChange = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00006297 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00006298 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00006299 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithd83547a2015-10-09 18:44:40 +00006300 Instruction *Insn = &*BI++;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006301 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn);
Adrian Prantl32da8892014-04-25 20:49:25 +00006302 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These
6303 // instrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca)
6304 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca
6305 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to
6306 // where said address is used.
6307 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006308 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn;
6309 continue;
6310 }
6311
6312 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue());
6313 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) {
Reid Kleckner8de1fe22015-12-08 23:00:03 +00006314 // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert
6315 // after it.
6316 if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad())
6317 continue;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006318 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" << *DVI << ' ' << *VI);
6319 DVI->removeFromParent();
Reid Klecknere18f92b2015-12-08 22:33:23 +00006320 if (isa<PHINode>(VI))
6321 DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt());
6322 else
6323 DVI->insertAfter(VI);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00006324 MadeChange = true;
6325 ++NumDbgValueMoved;
6326 }
6327 }
6328 }
6329 return MadeChange;
6330}
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +00006331
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006332/// \brief Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t.
6333static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) {
6334 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse;
6335 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / UINT32_MAX) + 1;
6336 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale;
6337 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale;
6338}
6339
6340/// \brief Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like:
6341/// \code
6342/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6343/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6344/// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1
6345/// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6346/// \endcode
6347/// into multiple branch instructions like:
6348/// \code
6349/// bb1:
6350/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
6351/// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2
6352/// bb2:
6353/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
6354/// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
6355/// \endcode
6356/// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations
6357/// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is
6358/// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions.
6359///
6360/// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG.
6361///
6362bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) {
David Blaikiedc3f01e2015-03-09 01:57:13 +00006363 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive())
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006364 return false;
6365
6366 bool MadeChange = false;
6367 for (auto &BB : F) {
6368 // Does this BB end with the following?
6369 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6370 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
6371 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2
6372 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2"
6373 BinaryOperator *LogicOp;
6374 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB;
6375 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB)))
6376 continue;
6377
Sanjay Patel42574202015-09-02 19:23:23 +00006378 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator());
6379 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
6380 continue;
6381
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006382 unsigned Opc;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006383 Value *Cond1, *Cond2;
6384 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6385 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006386 Opc = Instruction::And;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006387 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
6388 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006389 Opc = Instruction::Or;
6390 else
6391 continue;
6392
6393 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ||
6394 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) )
6395 continue;
6396
6397 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump());
6398
6399 // Create a new BB.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smitha848c472016-02-21 19:52:15 +00006400 auto TmpBB =
6401 BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split",
6402 BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode());
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006403
6404 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the
6405 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006406 Br1->setCondition(Cond1);
6407 LogicOp->eraseFromParent();
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006408
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006409 // Depending on the conditon we have to either replace the true or the false
6410 // successor of the original branch instruction.
6411 if (Opc == Instruction::And)
6412 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB);
6413 else
6414 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB);
6415
6416 // Fill in the new basic block.
6417 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB);
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00006418 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) {
6419 I->removeFromParent();
6420 I->insertBefore(Br2);
6421 }
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006422
6423 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be
Hiroshi Inoue6a391bb2017-06-27 10:35:37 +00006424 // replaced in one successor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006425 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one
6426 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target
6427 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition
6428 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that
Simon Pilgrimf2fbf432016-11-20 13:47:59 +00006429 // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006430 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch
6431 // instruction (or any other instruction).
6432 if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
6433 std::swap(TBB, FBB);
6434
6435 // Replace the old BB with the new BB.
6436 for (auto &I : *TBB) {
6437 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
6438 if (!PN)
6439 break;
6440 int i;
6441 while ((i = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0)
6442 PN->setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB);
6443 }
6444
6445 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB.
6446 for (auto &I : *FBB) {
6447 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
6448 if (!PN)
6449 break;
6450 auto *Val = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB);
6451 PN->addIncoming(Val, TmpBB);
6452 }
6453
6454 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder::
6455 // FindMergedConditions).
6456 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) {
6457 // Codegen X | Y as:
6458 // BB1:
6459 // jmp_if_X TBB
6460 // jmp TmpBB
6461 // TmpBB:
6462 // jmp_if_Y TBB
6463 // jmp FBB
6464 //
6465
6466 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB.
6467 // The requirement is that
6468 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB)
6469 // = TrueProb for orignal BB.
6470 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6471 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice
6472 // assumes that
6473 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB.
6474 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for
6475 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated.
6476 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00006477 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006478 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6479 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight;
6480 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6481 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6482 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6483
6484 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
6485 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight;
6486 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6487 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6488 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6489 }
6490 } else {
6491 // Codegen X & Y as:
6492 // BB1:
6493 // jmp_if_X TmpBB
6494 // jmp FBB
6495 // TmpBB:
6496 // jmp_if_Y TBB
6497 // jmp FBB
6498 //
6499 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB.
6500
6501 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB.
6502 // The requirement is that
6503 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB)
6504 // = FalseProb for orignal BB.
6505 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
6506 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice
6507 // assumes that
6508 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB.
6509 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Sanjay Pateldc88bd62016-04-23 20:01:22 +00006510 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006511 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
6512 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6513 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6514 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
6515 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6516
6517 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight;
6518 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
6519 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
6520 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
6521 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
6522 }
6523 }
6524
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006525 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00006526 // available to CodeGenPrepare.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00006527 ModifiedDT = true;
6528
6529 MadeChange = true;
6530
6531 DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump();
6532 TmpBB->dump());
6533 }
6534 return MadeChange;
6535}